Mercurial > vim
annotate src/gui_gtk_x11.c @ 2270:917fff7bc09d vim73
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
---|---|
date | Tue, 22 Jun 2010 06:07:12 +0200 |
parents | 4620acaf4814 |
children | e4d849f4df03 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
7 | 1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4: |
2 * | |
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar | |
4 * | |
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions. | |
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed. | |
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code. | |
8 */ | |
9 | |
10 /* | |
11 * Porting to GTK+ was done by: | |
12 * | |
70 | 13 * (C) 1998,1999,2000 by Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de> |
7 | 14 * |
15 * With GREAT support and continuous encouragements by Andy Kahn and of | |
16 * course Bram Moolenaar! | |
17 * | |
18 * Support for GTK+ 2 was added by: | |
19 * | |
20 * (C) 2002,2003 Jason Hildebrand <jason@peaceworks.ca> | |
21 * Daniel Elstner <daniel.elstner@gmx.net> | |
22 */ | |
23 | |
24 #include "vim.h" | |
1666 | 25 |
7 | 26 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
27 /* Gnome redefines _() and N_(). Grrr... */ | |
28 # ifdef _ | |
29 # undef _ | |
30 # endif | |
31 # ifdef N_ | |
32 # undef N_ | |
33 # endif | |
34 # ifdef textdomain | |
35 # undef textdomain | |
36 # endif | |
37 # ifdef bindtextdomain | |
38 # undef bindtextdomain | |
39 # endif | |
1286 | 40 # ifdef bind_textdomain_codeset |
41 # undef bind_textdomain_codeset | |
1226 | 42 # endif |
7 | 43 # if defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) && !defined(ENABLE_NLS) |
44 # define ENABLE_NLS /* so the texts in the dialog boxes are translated */ | |
45 # endif | |
46 # include <gnome.h> | |
47 # include "version.h" | |
798 | 48 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
49 /* missing prototype in bonobo-dock-item.h */ | |
50 extern void bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(BonoboDockItem *dock_item, BonoboDockItemBehavior beh); | |
51 # endif | |
7 | 52 #endif |
53 | |
54 #if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && defined(PROTO) | |
55 /* When generating prototypes we don't want syntax errors. */ | |
56 # define GdkAtom int | |
57 # define GdkEventExpose int | |
58 # define GdkEventFocus int | |
59 # define GdkEventVisibility int | |
60 # define GdkEventProperty int | |
61 # define GtkContainer int | |
62 # define GtkTargetEntry int | |
63 # define GtkType int | |
64 # define GtkWidget int | |
65 # define gint int | |
66 # define gpointer int | |
67 # define guint int | |
68 # define GdkEventKey int | |
69 # define GdkEventSelection int | |
70 # define GtkSelectionData int | |
71 # define GdkEventMotion int | |
72 # define GdkEventButton int | |
73 # define GdkDragContext int | |
74 # define GdkEventConfigure int | |
75 # define GdkEventClient int | |
76 #else | |
77 # include <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h> | |
78 # include <gdk/gdk.h> | |
79 # ifdef WIN3264 | |
80 # include <gdk/gdkwin32.h> | |
81 # else | |
82 # include <gdk/gdkx.h> | |
83 # endif | |
84 | |
85 # include <gtk/gtk.h> | |
86 # include "gui_gtk_f.h" | |
87 #endif | |
88 | |
89 #ifdef HAVE_X11_SUNKEYSYM_H | |
90 # include <X11/Sunkeysym.h> | |
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
91 static guint32 clipboard_event_time = CurrentTime; |
7 | 92 #endif |
93 | |
94 /* | |
95 * Easy-to-use macro for multihead support. | |
96 */ | |
97 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
98 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display( \ | |
99 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin), atom) | |
100 #else | |
101 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) ((Atom)(atom)) | |
102 #endif | |
103 | |
104 /* Selection type distinguishers */ | |
105 enum | |
106 { | |
107 TARGET_TYPE_NONE, | |
108 TARGET_UTF8_STRING, | |
109 TARGET_STRING, | |
110 TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT, | |
1904 | 111 TARGET_HTML, |
7 | 112 TARGET_TEXT, |
113 TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST, | |
114 TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN, | |
115 TARGET_VIM, | |
116 TARGET_VIMENC | |
117 }; | |
118 | |
119 /* | |
120 * Table of selection targets supported by Vim. | |
121 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
122 */ | |
123 static const GtkTargetEntry selection_targets[] = | |
124 { | |
125 {VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIMENC}, | |
126 {VIM_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIM}, | |
127 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 128 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
7 | 129 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
130 #endif | |
131 {"COMPOUND_TEXT", 0, TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT}, | |
132 {"TEXT", 0, TARGET_TEXT}, | |
133 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING} | |
134 }; | |
135 #define N_SELECTION_TARGETS (sizeof(selection_targets) / sizeof(selection_targets[0])) | |
136 | |
137 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
138 /* | |
139 * Table of DnD targets supported by Vim. | |
140 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first. | |
141 */ | |
142 static const GtkTargetEntry dnd_targets[] = | |
143 { | |
144 {"text/uri-list", 0, TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST}, | |
145 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 146 {"text/html", 0, TARGET_HTML}, |
7 | 147 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING}, |
148 # endif | |
149 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING}, | |
150 {"text/plain", 0, TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN} | |
151 }; | |
152 # define N_DND_TARGETS (sizeof(dnd_targets) / sizeof(dnd_targets[0])) | |
153 #endif | |
154 | |
155 | |
156 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
157 /* | |
158 * "Monospace" is a standard font alias that should be present | |
159 * on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. | |
160 */ | |
161 # define DEFAULT_FONT "Monospace 10" | |
162 | |
163 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
164 /* | |
165 * This is the single only fixed width font in X11, which seems to be present | |
166 * on all servers and available in all the variants we need. | |
167 */ | |
168 # define DEFAULT_FONT "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-*-*-m-*-*-*" | |
169 | |
170 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
171 | |
172 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
173 /* | |
174 * Atoms used to communicate save-yourself from the X11 session manager. There | |
175 * is no need to move them into the GUI struct, since they should be constant. | |
176 */ | |
177 static GdkAtom wm_protocols_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
178 static GdkAtom save_yourself_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
179 #endif | |
180 | |
181 /* | |
182 * Atoms used to control/reference X11 selections. | |
183 */ | |
184 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 185 static GdkAtom html_atom = GDK_NONE; |
7 | 186 static GdkAtom utf8_string_atom = GDK_NONE; |
187 #endif | |
188 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
189 static GdkAtom compound_text_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
190 static GdkAtom text_atom = GDK_NONE; | |
191 #endif | |
192 static GdkAtom vim_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's own special selection format */ | |
193 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
194 static GdkAtom vimenc_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's extended selection format */ | |
195 #endif | |
196 | |
197 /* | |
198 * Keycodes recognized by vim. | |
199 * NOTE: when changing this, the table in gui_x11.c probably needs the same | |
200 * change! | |
201 */ | |
202 static struct special_key | |
203 { | |
204 guint key_sym; | |
205 char_u code0; | |
206 char_u code1; | |
207 } | |
208 const special_keys[] = | |
209 { | |
210 {GDK_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
211 {GDK_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
212 {GDK_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
213 {GDK_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
214 {GDK_F1, 'k', '1'}, | |
215 {GDK_F2, 'k', '2'}, | |
216 {GDK_F3, 'k', '3'}, | |
217 {GDK_F4, 'k', '4'}, | |
218 {GDK_F5, 'k', '5'}, | |
219 {GDK_F6, 'k', '6'}, | |
220 {GDK_F7, 'k', '7'}, | |
221 {GDK_F8, 'k', '8'}, | |
222 {GDK_F9, 'k', '9'}, | |
223 {GDK_F10, 'k', ';'}, | |
224 {GDK_F11, 'F', '1'}, | |
225 {GDK_F12, 'F', '2'}, | |
226 {GDK_F13, 'F', '3'}, | |
227 {GDK_F14, 'F', '4'}, | |
228 {GDK_F15, 'F', '5'}, | |
229 {GDK_F16, 'F', '6'}, | |
230 {GDK_F17, 'F', '7'}, | |
231 {GDK_F18, 'F', '8'}, | |
232 {GDK_F19, 'F', '9'}, | |
233 {GDK_F20, 'F', 'A'}, | |
234 {GDK_F21, 'F', 'B'}, | |
235 {GDK_Pause, 'F', 'B'}, /* Pause == F21 according to netbeans.txt */ | |
236 {GDK_F22, 'F', 'C'}, | |
237 {GDK_F23, 'F', 'D'}, | |
238 {GDK_F24, 'F', 'E'}, | |
239 {GDK_F25, 'F', 'F'}, | |
240 {GDK_F26, 'F', 'G'}, | |
241 {GDK_F27, 'F', 'H'}, | |
242 {GDK_F28, 'F', 'I'}, | |
243 {GDK_F29, 'F', 'J'}, | |
244 {GDK_F30, 'F', 'K'}, | |
245 {GDK_F31, 'F', 'L'}, | |
246 {GDK_F32, 'F', 'M'}, | |
247 {GDK_F33, 'F', 'N'}, | |
248 {GDK_F34, 'F', 'O'}, | |
249 {GDK_F35, 'F', 'P'}, | |
250 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
251 {SunXK_F36, 'F', 'Q'}, | |
252 {SunXK_F37, 'F', 'R'}, | |
253 #endif | |
254 {GDK_Help, '%', '1'}, | |
255 {GDK_Undo, '&', '8'}, | |
256 {GDK_BackSpace, 'k', 'b'}, | |
257 {GDK_Insert, 'k', 'I'}, | |
258 {GDK_Delete, 'k', 'D'}, | |
259 {GDK_3270_BackTab, 'k', 'B'}, | |
260 {GDK_Clear, 'k', 'C'}, | |
261 {GDK_Home, 'k', 'h'}, | |
262 {GDK_End, '@', '7'}, | |
263 {GDK_Prior, 'k', 'P'}, | |
264 {GDK_Next, 'k', 'N'}, | |
265 {GDK_Print, '%', '9'}, | |
266 /* Keypad keys: */ | |
267 {GDK_KP_Left, 'k', 'l'}, | |
268 {GDK_KP_Right, 'k', 'r'}, | |
269 {GDK_KP_Up, 'k', 'u'}, | |
270 {GDK_KP_Down, 'k', 'd'}, | |
271 {GDK_KP_Insert, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KINS}, | |
272 {GDK_KP_Delete, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KDEL}, | |
273 {GDK_KP_Home, 'K', '1'}, | |
274 {GDK_KP_End, 'K', '4'}, | |
275 {GDK_KP_Prior, 'K', '3'}, /* page up */ | |
276 {GDK_KP_Next, 'K', '5'}, /* page down */ | |
277 | |
278 {GDK_KP_Add, 'K', '6'}, | |
279 {GDK_KP_Subtract, 'K', '7'}, | |
280 {GDK_KP_Divide, 'K', '8'}, | |
281 {GDK_KP_Multiply, 'K', '9'}, | |
282 {GDK_KP_Enter, 'K', 'A'}, | |
283 {GDK_KP_Decimal, 'K', 'B'}, | |
284 | |
285 {GDK_KP_0, 'K', 'C'}, | |
286 {GDK_KP_1, 'K', 'D'}, | |
287 {GDK_KP_2, 'K', 'E'}, | |
288 {GDK_KP_3, 'K', 'F'}, | |
289 {GDK_KP_4, 'K', 'G'}, | |
290 {GDK_KP_5, 'K', 'H'}, | |
291 {GDK_KP_6, 'K', 'I'}, | |
292 {GDK_KP_7, 'K', 'J'}, | |
293 {GDK_KP_8, 'K', 'K'}, | |
294 {GDK_KP_9, 'K', 'L'}, | |
295 | |
296 /* End of list marker: */ | |
297 {0, 0, 0} | |
298 }; | |
299 | |
300 /* | |
301 * Flags for command line options table below. | |
302 */ | |
303 #define ARG_FONT 1 | |
304 #define ARG_GEOMETRY 2 | |
305 #define ARG_REVERSE 3 | |
306 #define ARG_NOREVERSE 4 | |
307 #define ARG_BACKGROUND 5 | |
308 #define ARG_FOREGROUND 6 | |
309 #define ARG_ICONIC 7 | |
310 #define ARG_ROLE 8 | |
311 #define ARG_NETBEANS 9 | |
312 #define ARG_XRM 10 /* ignored */ | |
313 #define ARG_MENUFONT 11 /* ignored */ | |
314 #define ARG_INDEX_MASK 0x00ff | |
315 #define ARG_HAS_VALUE 0x0100 /* a value is expected after the argument */ | |
316 #define ARG_NEEDS_GUI 0x0200 /* need to initialize the GUI for this */ | |
317 #define ARG_FOR_GTK 0x0400 /* argument is handled by GTK+ or GNOME */ | |
318 #define ARG_COMPAT_LONG 0x0800 /* accept -foo but substitute with --foo */ | |
319 #define ARG_KEEP 0x1000 /* don't remove argument from argv[] */ | |
320 | |
321 /* | |
322 * This table holds all the X GUI command line options allowed. This includes | |
323 * the standard ones so that we can skip them when Vim is started without the | |
324 * GUI (but the GUI might start up later). | |
325 * | |
326 * When changing this, also update doc/gui_x11.txt and the usage message!!! | |
327 */ | |
328 typedef struct | |
329 { | |
330 const char *name; | |
331 unsigned int flags; | |
332 } | |
333 cmdline_option_T; | |
334 | |
335 static const cmdline_option_T cmdline_options[] = | |
336 { | |
337 /* We handle these options ourselves */ | |
338 {"-fn", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
339 {"-font", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
340 {"-geom", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
341 {"-geometry", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
342 {"-rv", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
343 {"-reverse", ARG_REVERSE}, | |
344 {"+rv", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
345 {"+reverse", ARG_NOREVERSE}, | |
346 {"-bg", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
347 {"-background", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
348 {"-fg", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
349 {"-foreground", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
350 {"-iconic", ARG_ICONIC}, | |
351 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
352 {"--role", ARG_ROLE|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
353 #endif | |
354 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
355 {"-nb", ARG_NETBEANS}, /* non-standard value format */ | |
356 {"-xrm", ARG_XRM|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
357 {"-mf", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
358 {"-menufont", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */ | |
359 #endif | |
360 #if 0 /* not implemented; these arguments don't make sense for GTK+ */ | |
361 {"-boldfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
362 {"-italicfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
363 {"-bw", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
364 {"-borderwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
365 {"-sw", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
366 {"-scrollbarwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
367 #endif | |
368 /* Arguments handled by GTK (and GNOME) internally. */ | |
369 {"--g-fatal-warnings", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
370 {"--gdk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
371 {"--gdk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
372 {"--gtk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
373 {"--gtk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
374 {"--gtk-module", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
375 {"--sync", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
376 {"--display", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
377 {"--name", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
378 {"--class", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG}, | |
379 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
380 {"--screen", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
381 {"--gxid-host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
382 {"--gxid-port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
383 #else /* these don't seem to exist anymore */ | |
384 {"--no-xshm", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
385 {"--xim-preedit", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
386 {"--xim-status", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
387 {"--gxid_host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
388 {"--gxid_port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
389 #endif | |
390 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
391 {"--load-modules", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
392 {"--sm-client-id", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
393 {"--sm-config-prefix", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
394 {"--sm-disable", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
395 {"--oaf-ior-fd", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
396 {"--oaf-activate-iid", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
397 {"--oaf-private", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
398 {"--enable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
399 {"--disable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
400 {"--espeaker", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, | |
401 {"-?", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
402 {"--help", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI|ARG_KEEP}, | |
403 {"--usage", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
404 # if 0 /* conflicts with Vim's own --version argument */ | |
405 {"--version", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI}, | |
406 # endif | |
407 {"--disable-crash-dialog", ARG_FOR_GTK}, | |
408 #endif | |
409 {NULL, 0} | |
410 }; | |
411 | |
412 static int gui_argc = 0; | |
413 static char **gui_argv = NULL; | |
414 | |
415 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
416 static const char *role_argument = NULL; | |
417 #endif | |
418 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
419 static const char *restart_command = NULL; | |
1898 | 420 static char *abs_restart_command = NULL; |
7 | 421 #endif |
422 static int found_iconic_arg = FALSE; | |
423 | |
424 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
425 /* | |
426 * Can't use Gnome if --socketid given | |
427 */ | |
428 static int using_gnome = 0; | |
429 #else | |
430 # define using_gnome 0 | |
431 #endif | |
432 | |
433 /* | |
434 * Parse the GUI related command-line arguments. Any arguments used are | |
435 * deleted from argv, and *argc is decremented accordingly. This is called | |
436 * when vim is started, whether or not the GUI has been started. | |
437 */ | |
438 void | |
439 gui_mch_prepare(int *argc, char **argv) | |
440 { | |
441 const cmdline_option_T *option; | |
442 int i = 0; | |
443 int len = 0; | |
444 | |
445 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
446 /* | |
447 * Determine the command used to invoke Vim, to be passed as restart | |
448 * command to the session manager. If argv[0] contains any directory | |
449 * components try building an absolute path, otherwise leave it as is. | |
450 */ | |
451 restart_command = argv[0]; | |
452 | |
453 if (strchr(argv[0], G_DIR_SEPARATOR) != NULL) | |
454 { | |
455 char_u buf[MAXPATHL]; | |
456 | |
457 if (mch_FullName((char_u *)argv[0], buf, (int)sizeof(buf), TRUE) == OK) | |
1898 | 458 { |
459 abs_restart_command = (char *)vim_strsave(buf); | |
460 restart_command = abs_restart_command; | |
461 } | |
7 | 462 } |
463 #endif | |
464 | |
465 /* | |
466 * Move all the entries in argv which are relevant to GTK+ and GNOME | |
467 * into gui_argv. Freed later in gui_mch_init(). | |
468 */ | |
469 gui_argc = 0; | |
470 gui_argv = (char **)alloc((unsigned)((*argc + 1) * sizeof(char *))); | |
471 | |
472 g_return_if_fail(gui_argv != NULL); | |
473 | |
474 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i++]; | |
475 | |
476 while (i < *argc) | |
477 { | |
478 /* Don't waste CPU cycles on non-option arguments. */ | |
479 if (argv[i][0] != '-' && argv[i][0] != '+') | |
480 { | |
481 ++i; | |
482 continue; | |
483 } | |
484 | |
485 /* Look for argv[i] in cmdline_options[] table. */ | |
486 for (option = &cmdline_options[0]; option->name != NULL; ++option) | |
487 { | |
488 len = strlen(option->name); | |
489 | |
490 if (strncmp(argv[i], option->name, len) == 0) | |
491 { | |
492 if (argv[i][len] == '\0') | |
493 break; | |
494 /* allow --foo=bar style */ | |
495 if (argv[i][len] == '=' && (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)) | |
496 break; | |
497 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
498 /* darn, -nb has non-standard syntax */ | |
499 if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":=", argv[i][len]) != NULL | |
500 && (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) == ARG_NETBEANS) | |
501 break; | |
502 #endif | |
503 } | |
504 else if ((option->flags & ARG_COMPAT_LONG) | |
505 && strcmp(argv[i], option->name + 1) == 0) | |
506 { | |
507 /* Replace the standard X arguments "-name" and "-display" | |
508 * with their GNU-style long option counterparts. */ | |
509 argv[i] = (char *)option->name; | |
510 break; | |
511 } | |
512 } | |
513 if (option->name == NULL) /* no match */ | |
514 { | |
515 ++i; | |
516 continue; | |
517 } | |
518 | |
519 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
520 { | |
521 /* Move the argument into gui_argv, which | |
522 * will later be passed to gtk_init_check() */ | |
523 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i]; | |
524 } | |
525 else | |
526 { | |
527 char *value = NULL; | |
528 | |
529 /* Extract the option's value if there is one. | |
530 * Accept both "--foo bar" and "--foo=bar" style. */ | |
531 if (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
532 { | |
533 if (argv[i][len] == '=') | |
534 value = &argv[i][len + 1]; | |
535 else if (i + 1 < *argc && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
536 value = argv[i + 1]; | |
537 } | |
538 | |
539 /* Check for options handled by Vim itself */ | |
540 switch (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) | |
541 { | |
542 case ARG_REVERSE: | |
543 found_reverse_arg = TRUE; | |
544 break; | |
545 case ARG_NOREVERSE: | |
546 found_reverse_arg = FALSE; | |
547 break; | |
548 case ARG_FONT: | |
549 font_argument = value; | |
550 break; | |
551 case ARG_GEOMETRY: | |
552 if (value != NULL) | |
553 gui.geom = vim_strsave((char_u *)value); | |
554 break; | |
555 case ARG_BACKGROUND: | |
556 background_argument = value; | |
557 break; | |
558 case ARG_FOREGROUND: | |
559 foreground_argument = value; | |
560 break; | |
561 case ARG_ICONIC: | |
562 found_iconic_arg = TRUE; | |
563 break; | |
564 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
565 case ARG_ROLE: | |
566 role_argument = value; /* used later in gui_mch_open() */ | |
567 break; | |
568 #endif | |
569 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG | |
570 case ARG_NETBEANS: | |
571 gui.dofork = FALSE; /* don't fork() when starting GUI */ | |
572 netbeansArg = argv[i]; | |
573 break; | |
574 #endif | |
575 default: | |
576 break; | |
577 } | |
578 } | |
579 | |
580 /* These arguments make gnome_program_init() print a message and exit. | |
581 * Must start the GUI for this, otherwise ":gui" will exit later! */ | |
582 if (option->flags & ARG_NEEDS_GUI) | |
583 gui.starting = TRUE; | |
584 | |
585 if (option->flags & ARG_KEEP) | |
586 ++i; | |
587 else | |
588 { | |
589 /* Remove the flag from the argument vector. */ | |
590 if (--*argc > i) | |
591 { | |
592 int n_strip = 1; | |
593 | |
594 /* Move the argument's value as well, if there is one. */ | |
595 if ((option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE) | |
596 && argv[i][len] != '=' | |
597 && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0) | |
598 { | |
599 ++n_strip; | |
600 --*argc; | |
601 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK) | |
602 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i + 1]; | |
603 } | |
604 | |
605 if (*argc > i) | |
606 mch_memmove(&argv[i], &argv[i + n_strip], | |
607 (*argc - i) * sizeof(char *)); | |
608 } | |
609 argv[*argc] = NULL; | |
610 } | |
611 } | |
612 | |
613 gui_argv[gui_argc] = NULL; | |
614 } | |
615 | |
359 | 616 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO) |
617 void | |
618 gui_mch_free_all() | |
619 { | |
620 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
1898 | 621 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) |
622 vim_free(abs_restart_command); | |
623 #endif | |
359 | 624 } |
625 #endif | |
626 | |
7 | 627 /* |
628 * This should be maybe completely removed. | |
629 * Doesn't seem possible, since check_copy_area() relies on | |
630 * this information. --danielk | |
631 */ | |
632 static gint | |
1884 | 633 visibility_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
634 GdkEventVisibility *event, | |
635 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 636 { |
637 gui.visibility = event->state; | |
638 /* | |
639 * When we do an gdk_window_copy_area(), and the window is partially | |
640 * obscured, we want to receive an event to tell us whether it worked | |
641 * or not. | |
642 */ | |
643 if (gui.text_gc != NULL) | |
644 gdk_gc_set_exposures(gui.text_gc, | |
645 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
646 return FALSE; | |
647 } | |
648 | |
649 /* | |
650 * Redraw the corresponding portions of the screen. | |
651 */ | |
652 static gint | |
1884 | 653 expose_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
654 GdkEventExpose *event, | |
655 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 656 { |
657 /* Skip this when the GUI isn't set up yet, will redraw later. */ | |
658 if (gui.starting) | |
659 return FALSE; | |
660 | |
661 out_flush(); /* make sure all output has been processed */ | |
662 gui_redraw(event->area.x, event->area.y, | |
663 event->area.width, event->area.height); | |
664 | |
665 /* Clear the border areas if needed */ | |
666 if (event->area.x < FILL_X(0)) | |
667 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, FILL_X(0), 0); | |
668 if (event->area.y < FILL_Y(0)) | |
669 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, 0, FILL_Y(0)); | |
670 if (event->area.x > FILL_X(Columns)) | |
671 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, | |
672 FILL_X((int)Columns), 0, 0, 0); | |
673 if (event->area.y > FILL_Y(Rows)) | |
674 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, FILL_Y((int)Rows), 0, 0); | |
675 | |
676 return FALSE; | |
677 } | |
678 | |
679 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
680 /* | |
681 * Handle changes to the "Comm" property | |
682 */ | |
683 static gint | |
1884 | 684 property_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
685 GdkEventProperty *event, | |
686 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 687 { |
688 if (event->type == GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY | |
689 && event->state == (int)GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE | |
690 && GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(event->window) == commWindow | |
691 && GET_X_ATOM(event->atom) == commProperty) | |
692 { | |
693 XEvent xev; | |
694 | |
695 /* Translate to XLib */ | |
696 xev.xproperty.type = PropertyNotify; | |
697 xev.xproperty.atom = commProperty; | |
698 xev.xproperty.window = commWindow; | |
699 xev.xproperty.state = PropertyNewValue; | |
700 serverEventProc(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(widget->window), &xev); | |
701 | |
702 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
703 gtk_main_quit(); | |
704 } | |
705 return FALSE; | |
706 } | |
707 #endif | |
708 | |
709 | |
710 /**************************************************************************** | |
711 * Focus handlers: | |
712 */ | |
713 | |
714 | |
715 /* | |
716 * This is a simple state machine: | |
717 * BLINK_NONE not blinking at all | |
718 * BLINK_OFF blinking, cursor is not shown | |
719 * BLINK_ON blinking, cursor is shown | |
720 */ | |
721 | |
722 #define BLINK_NONE 0 | |
723 #define BLINK_OFF 1 | |
724 #define BLINK_ON 2 | |
725 | |
726 static int blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
727 static long_u blink_waittime = 700; | |
728 static long_u blink_ontime = 400; | |
729 static long_u blink_offtime = 250; | |
730 static guint blink_timer = 0; | |
731 | |
732 void | |
733 gui_mch_set_blinking(long waittime, long on, long off) | |
734 { | |
735 blink_waittime = waittime; | |
736 blink_ontime = on; | |
737 blink_offtime = off; | |
738 } | |
739 | |
740 /* | |
741 * Stop the cursor blinking. Show the cursor if it wasn't shown. | |
742 */ | |
743 void | |
744 gui_mch_stop_blink(void) | |
745 { | |
746 if (blink_timer) | |
747 { | |
748 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); | |
749 blink_timer = 0; | |
750 } | |
751 if (blink_state == BLINK_OFF) | |
752 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
753 blink_state = BLINK_NONE; | |
754 } | |
755 | |
756 static gint | |
1884 | 757 blink_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 758 { |
759 if (blink_state == BLINK_ON) | |
760 { | |
761 gui_undraw_cursor(); | |
762 blink_state = BLINK_OFF; | |
763 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_offtime, | |
764 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
765 } | |
766 else | |
767 { | |
768 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
769 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
770 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_ontime, | |
771 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
772 } | |
773 | |
774 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
775 } | |
776 | |
777 /* | |
778 * Start the cursor blinking. If it was already blinking, this restarts the | |
779 * waiting time and shows the cursor. | |
780 */ | |
781 void | |
782 gui_mch_start_blink(void) | |
783 { | |
784 if (blink_timer) | |
785 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer); | |
786 /* Only switch blinking on if none of the times is zero */ | |
787 if (blink_waittime && blink_ontime && blink_offtime && gui.in_focus) | |
788 { | |
789 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_waittime, | |
790 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL); | |
791 blink_state = BLINK_ON; | |
792 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE); | |
793 } | |
794 } | |
795 | |
796 static gint | |
1884 | 797 enter_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
798 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
799 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 800 { |
801 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
802 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
803 | |
804 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */ | |
805 if (gtk_socket_id == 0 || !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(gui.drawarea)) | |
806 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); | |
807 | |
808 return FALSE; | |
809 } | |
810 | |
811 static gint | |
1884 | 812 leave_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
813 GdkEventCrossing *event UNUSED, | |
814 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 815 { |
816 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
817 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
818 | |
819 return FALSE; | |
820 } | |
821 | |
822 static gint | |
1884 | 823 focus_in_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
824 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, | |
825 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 826 { |
827 gui_focus_change(TRUE); | |
828 | |
829 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE) | |
830 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
831 | |
1380 | 832 /* make sure keyboard input goes to the draw area (if this is focus for a |
833 * window) */ | |
791 | 834 if (widget != gui.drawarea) |
856 | 835 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea); |
7 | 836 |
1380 | 837 /* make sure the input buffer is read */ |
838 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
839 gtk_main_quit(); | |
840 | |
7 | 841 return TRUE; |
842 } | |
843 | |
844 static gint | |
1884 | 845 focus_out_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
846 GdkEventFocus *event UNUSED, | |
847 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 848 { |
849 gui_focus_change(FALSE); | |
850 | |
851 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE) | |
852 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
853 | |
1380 | 854 /* make sure the input buffer is read */ |
855 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
856 gtk_main_quit(); | |
857 | |
7 | 858 return TRUE; |
859 } | |
860 | |
861 | |
862 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
863 /* | |
864 * Translate a GDK key value to UTF-8 independently of the current locale. | |
865 * The output is written to string, which must have room for at least 6 bytes | |
866 * plus the NUL terminator. Returns the length in bytes. | |
867 * | |
868 * This function is used in the GTK+ 2 GUI only. The GTK+ 1 code makes use | |
869 * of GdkEventKey::string instead. But event->string is evil; see here why: | |
870 * http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gdk/gdk-Event-Structures.html#GdkEventKey | |
871 */ | |
872 static int | |
873 keyval_to_string(unsigned int keyval, unsigned int state, char_u *string) | |
874 { | |
875 int len; | |
876 guint32 uc; | |
877 | |
878 uc = gdk_keyval_to_unicode(keyval); | |
879 if (uc != 0) | |
880 { | |
881 /* Check for CTRL-foo */ | |
882 if ((state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) && uc >= 0x20 && uc < 0x80) | |
883 { | |
884 /* These mappings look arbitrary at the first glance, but in fact | |
885 * resemble quite exactly the behaviour of the GTK+ 1.2 GUI on my | |
886 * machine. The only difference is BS vs. DEL for CTRL-8 (makes | |
887 * more sense and is consistent with usual terminal behaviour). */ | |
888 if (uc >= '@') | |
889 string[0] = uc & 0x1F; | |
890 else if (uc == '2') | |
891 string[0] = NUL; | |
892 else if (uc >= '3' && uc <= '7') | |
893 string[0] = uc ^ 0x28; | |
894 else if (uc == '8') | |
895 string[0] = BS; | |
896 else if (uc == '?') | |
897 string[0] = DEL; | |
898 else | |
899 string[0] = uc; | |
900 len = 1; | |
901 } | |
902 else | |
903 { | |
904 /* Translate a normal key to UTF-8. This doesn't work for dead | |
905 * keys of course, you _have_ to use an input method for that. */ | |
906 len = utf_char2bytes((int)uc, string); | |
907 } | |
908 } | |
909 else | |
910 { | |
911 /* Translate keys which are represented by ASCII control codes in Vim. | |
912 * There are only a few of those; most control keys are translated to | |
913 * special terminal-like control sequences. */ | |
914 len = 1; | |
915 switch (keyval) | |
916 { | |
917 case GDK_Tab: case GDK_KP_Tab: case GDK_ISO_Left_Tab: | |
918 string[0] = TAB; | |
919 break; | |
920 case GDK_Linefeed: | |
921 string[0] = NL; | |
922 break; | |
923 case GDK_Return: case GDK_ISO_Enter: case GDK_3270_Enter: | |
924 string[0] = CAR; | |
925 break; | |
926 case GDK_Escape: | |
927 string[0] = ESC; | |
928 break; | |
929 default: | |
930 len = 0; | |
931 break; | |
932 } | |
933 } | |
934 string[len] = NUL; | |
935 | |
936 return len; | |
937 } | |
938 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
939 | |
179 | 940 static int |
941 modifiers_gdk2vim(guint state) | |
942 { | |
943 int modifiers = 0; | |
944 | |
945 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
946 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT; | |
947 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
948 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_CTRL; | |
949 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
950 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_ALT; | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
951 #ifdef GDK_SUPER_MASK |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
952 if (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
953 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
954 #endif |
179 | 955 if (state & GDK_MOD4_MASK) |
956 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META; | |
957 | |
958 return modifiers; | |
959 } | |
960 | |
961 static int | |
962 modifiers_gdk2mouse(guint state) | |
963 { | |
964 int modifiers = 0; | |
965 | |
966 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK) | |
967 modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT; | |
968 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) | |
969 modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL; | |
970 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
971 modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT; | |
972 | |
973 return modifiers; | |
974 } | |
975 | |
7 | 976 /* |
977 * Main keyboard handler: | |
978 */ | |
979 static gint | |
1884 | 980 key_press_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
981 GdkEventKey *event, | |
982 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 983 { |
984 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
985 /* 256 bytes is way over the top, but for safety let's reduce it only | |
986 * for GTK+ 2 where we know for sure how large the string might get. | |
987 * (That is, up to 6 bytes + NUL + CSI escapes + safety measure.) */ | |
988 char_u string[32], string2[32]; | |
989 #else | |
990 char_u string[256], string2[256]; | |
991 #endif | |
992 guint key_sym; | |
993 int len; | |
994 int i; | |
995 int modifiers; | |
996 int key; | |
997 guint state; | |
998 char_u *s, *d; | |
999 | |
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1000 clipboard_event_time = event->time; |
7 | 1001 key_sym = event->keyval; |
1002 state = event->state; | |
1003 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* deprecated */ | |
1004 len = event->length; | |
1005 g_assert(len <= sizeof(string)); | |
1006 #endif | |
1007 | |
1008 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1009 /* | |
1010 * It appears as if we always want to consume a key-press (there currently | |
1011 * aren't any 'return FALSE's), so we always do this: when running in a | |
1012 * GtkPlug and not a window, we must prevent emission of the key_press | |
1013 * EVENT from continuing (which is 'beyond' the level of stopping mere | |
1014 * signals by returning FALSE), otherwise things like tab/cursor-keys are | |
1015 * processed by the GtkPlug default handler, which moves input focus away | |
1016 * from us! | |
1017 * Note: This should no longer be necessary with GTK+ 2. | |
1018 */ | |
1019 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
1020 gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name(GTK_OBJECT(widget), "key_press_event"); | |
1021 #endif | |
1022 | |
1023 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
1024 if (xim_queue_key_press_event(event, TRUE)) | |
1025 return TRUE; | |
1026 #endif | |
1027 | |
1028 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
1029 if (key_sym == GDK_space && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
1030 { | |
1031 hangul_input_state_toggle(); | |
1032 return TRUE; | |
1033 } | |
1034 #endif | |
1035 | |
1036 #ifdef SunXK_F36 | |
1037 /* | |
1038 * These keys have bogus lookup strings, and trapping them here is | |
1039 * easier than trying to XRebindKeysym() on them with every possible | |
1040 * combination of modifiers. | |
1041 */ | |
1042 if (key_sym == SunXK_F36 || key_sym == SunXK_F37) | |
1043 len = 0; | |
1044 else | |
1045 #endif | |
1046 { | |
1047 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1048 len = keyval_to_string(key_sym, state, string2); | |
1049 | |
1050 /* Careful: convert_input() doesn't handle the NUL character. | |
1051 * No need to convert pure ASCII anyway, thus the len > 1 check. */ | |
1052 if (len > 1 && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1053 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2)); | |
1054 | |
1055 s = string2; | |
1056 #else | |
1057 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1058 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1059 { | |
1060 mch_memmove(string2, event->string, len); | |
1061 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2)); | |
1062 s = string2; | |
1063 } | |
1064 else | |
1065 # endif | |
1066 s = (char_u *)event->string; | |
1067 #endif | |
1068 | |
1069 d = string; | |
1070 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
1071 { | |
1072 *d++ = s[i]; | |
1073 if (d[-1] == CSI && d + 2 < string + sizeof(string)) | |
1074 { | |
1075 /* Turn CSI into K_CSI. */ | |
1076 *d++ = KS_EXTRA; | |
1077 *d++ = (int)KE_CSI; | |
1078 } | |
1079 } | |
1080 len = d - string; | |
1081 } | |
1082 | |
1083 /* Shift-Tab results in Left_Tab, but we want <S-Tab> */ | |
1084 if (key_sym == GDK_ISO_Left_Tab) | |
1085 { | |
1086 key_sym = GDK_Tab; | |
1087 state |= GDK_SHIFT_MASK; | |
1088 } | |
1089 | |
1090 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* for GTK+ 2, we handle this in keyval_to_string() */ | |
1091 if ((key_sym == GDK_2 || key_sym == GDK_at) && (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)) | |
1092 { | |
1093 string[0] = NUL; /* CTRL-2 and CTRL-@ is NUL */ | |
1094 len = 1; | |
1095 } | |
1096 else if (len == 0 && (key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab)) | |
1097 { | |
1098 /* When there are modifiers, these keys get zero length; we need the | |
1099 * original key here to be able to add a modifier below. */ | |
1100 string[0] = (key_sym & 0xff); | |
1101 len = 1; | |
1102 } | |
1103 #endif | |
1104 | |
1105 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
1106 /* If there is a menu and 'wak' is "yes", or 'wak' is "menu" and the key | |
1107 * is a menu shortcut, we ignore everything with the ALT modifier. */ | |
1108 if ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) | |
1109 && gui.menu_is_active | |
1110 && (*p_wak == 'y' | |
1111 || (*p_wak == 'm' | |
1112 && len == 1 | |
1113 && gui_is_menu_shortcut(string[0])))) | |
1114 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1115 /* For GTK2 we return false to signify that we haven't handled the | |
1116 * keypress, so that gtk will handle the mnemonic or accelerator. */ | |
1117 return FALSE; | |
1118 # else | |
1119 return TRUE; | |
1120 # endif | |
1121 #endif | |
1122 | |
1123 /* Check for Alt/Meta key (Mod1Mask), but not for a BS, DEL or character | |
1124 * that already has the 8th bit set. | |
1125 * Don't do this for <S-M-Tab>, that should become K_S_TAB with ALT. | |
1126 * Don't do this for double-byte encodings, it turns the char into a lead | |
1127 * byte. */ | |
1128 if (len == 1 | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1129 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1130 #ifdef GDK_SUPER_MASK |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1131 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1132 #endif |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1133 ) |
7 | 1134 && !(key_sym == GDK_BackSpace || key_sym == GDK_Delete) |
1135 && (string[0] & 0x80) == 0 | |
1136 && !(key_sym == GDK_Tab && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)) | |
1137 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1138 && !enc_dbcs | |
1139 #endif | |
1140 ) | |
1141 { | |
1142 string[0] |= 0x80; | |
1143 state &= ~GDK_MOD1_MASK; /* don't use it again */ | |
1144 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1145 if (enc_utf8) /* convert to utf-8 */ | |
1146 { | |
1147 string[1] = string[0] & 0xbf; | |
1148 string[0] = ((unsigned)string[0] >> 6) + 0xc0; | |
1149 if (string[1] == CSI) | |
1150 { | |
1151 string[2] = KS_EXTRA; | |
1152 string[3] = (int)KE_CSI; | |
1153 len = 4; | |
1154 } | |
1155 else | |
1156 len = 2; | |
1157 } | |
1158 #endif | |
1159 } | |
1160 | |
1161 /* Check for special keys. Also do this when len == 1 (key has an ASCII | |
1162 * value) to detect backspace, delete and keypad keys. */ | |
1163 if (len == 0 || len == 1) | |
1164 { | |
1165 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
1166 { | |
1167 if (special_keys[i].key_sym == key_sym) | |
1168 { | |
1169 string[0] = CSI; | |
1170 string[1] = special_keys[i].code0; | |
1171 string[2] = special_keys[i].code1; | |
1172 len = -3; | |
1173 break; | |
1174 } | |
1175 } | |
1176 } | |
1177 | |
1178 if (len == 0) /* Unrecognized key */ | |
1179 return TRUE; | |
1180 | |
1181 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2) | |
1182 /* Cancel or type backspace. For GTK2, im_commit_cb() does the same. */ | |
1183 preedit_start_col = MAXCOL; | |
1184 xim_changed_while_preediting = TRUE; | |
1185 #endif | |
1186 | |
1187 /* Special keys (and a few others) may have modifiers. Also when using a | |
1188 * double-byte encoding (can't set the 8th bit). */ | |
1189 if (len == -3 || key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab | |
1190 || key_sym == GDK_Return || key_sym == GDK_Linefeed | |
1191 || key_sym == GDK_Escape || key_sym == GDK_KP_Tab | |
1192 || key_sym == GDK_ISO_Enter || key_sym == GDK_3270_Enter | |
1193 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1194 || (enc_dbcs && len == 1 && ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1195 # ifdef GDK_SUPER_MASK |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1196 || (state & GDK_SUPER_MASK) |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1197 # endif |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1198 )) |
7 | 1199 #endif |
1200 ) | |
1201 { | |
179 | 1202 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
7 | 1203 |
1204 /* | |
1205 * For some keys a shift modifier is translated into another key | |
1206 * code. | |
1207 */ | |
1208 if (len == -3) | |
1209 key = TO_SPECIAL(string[1], string[2]); | |
1210 else | |
1211 key = string[0]; | |
1212 | |
1213 key = simplify_key(key, &modifiers); | |
1214 if (key == CSI) | |
1215 key = K_CSI; | |
1216 if (IS_SPECIAL(key)) | |
1217 { | |
1218 string[0] = CSI; | |
1219 string[1] = K_SECOND(key); | |
1220 string[2] = K_THIRD(key); | |
1221 len = 3; | |
1222 } | |
1223 else | |
1224 { | |
1225 string[0] = key; | |
1226 len = 1; | |
1227 } | |
1228 | |
1229 if (modifiers != 0) | |
1230 { | |
1231 string2[0] = CSI; | |
1232 string2[1] = KS_MODIFIER; | |
1233 string2[2] = modifiers; | |
1234 add_to_input_buf(string2, 3); | |
1235 } | |
1236 } | |
1237 | |
1238 if (len == 1 && ((string[0] == Ctrl_C && ctrl_c_interrupts) | |
1239 || (string[0] == intr_char && intr_char != Ctrl_C))) | |
1240 { | |
1241 trash_input_buf(); | |
1242 got_int = TRUE; | |
1243 } | |
1244 | |
1245 add_to_input_buf(string, len); | |
1246 | |
1247 /* blank out the pointer if necessary */ | |
1248 if (p_mh) | |
1249 gui_mch_mousehide(TRUE); | |
1250 | |
1251 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1252 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1253 | |
1254 return TRUE; | |
1255 } | |
1256 | |
1257 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) | |
1258 static gboolean | |
1884 | 1259 key_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
1260 GdkEventKey *event, | |
1261 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1262 { |
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1263 clipboard_event_time = event->time; |
7 | 1264 /* |
1265 * GTK+ 2 input methods may do fancy stuff on key release events too. | |
1266 * With the default IM for instance, you can enter any UCS code point | |
1267 * by holding down CTRL-SHIFT and typing hexadecimal digits. | |
1268 */ | |
1269 return xim_queue_key_press_event(event, FALSE); | |
1270 } | |
1271 #endif | |
1272 | |
1273 | |
1274 /**************************************************************************** | |
1275 * Selection handlers: | |
1276 */ | |
1277 | |
1278 static gint | |
1884 | 1279 selection_clear_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
7 | 1280 GdkEventSelection *event, |
1884 | 1281 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
7 | 1282 { |
1283 if (event->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
1284 clip_lose_selection(&clip_plus); | |
1285 else | |
1286 clip_lose_selection(&clip_star); | |
1287 | |
1288 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1289 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1290 | |
1291 return TRUE; | |
1292 } | |
1293 | |
1294 #define RS_NONE 0 /* selection_received_cb() not called yet */ | |
1295 #define RS_OK 1 /* selection_received_cb() called and OK */ | |
1296 #define RS_FAIL 2 /* selection_received_cb() called and failed */ | |
1297 static int received_selection = RS_NONE; | |
1298 | |
1299 static void | |
1884 | 1300 selection_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
7 | 1301 GtkSelectionData *data, |
1884 | 1302 guint time_ UNUSED, |
1303 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1304 { |
1305 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
1306 char_u *text; | |
1307 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
1308 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1309 guchar *tmpbuf_utf8 = NULL; | |
1310 #endif | |
1311 int len; | |
1312 int motion_type; | |
1313 | |
1314 if (data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
1315 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
1316 else | |
1317 cbd = &clip_star; | |
1318 | |
1319 text = (char_u *)data->data; | |
1320 len = data->length; | |
1321 motion_type = MCHAR; | |
1322 | |
1323 if (text == NULL || len <= 0) | |
1324 { | |
1325 received_selection = RS_FAIL; | |
1326 /* clip_free_selection(cbd); ??? */ | |
1327 | |
1328 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1329 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1330 | |
1331 return; | |
1332 } | |
1333 | |
1334 if (data->type == vim_atom) | |
1335 { | |
1336 motion_type = *text++; | |
1337 --len; | |
1338 } | |
1339 | |
1340 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1341 else if (data->type == vimenc_atom) | |
1342 { | |
1343 char_u *enc; | |
1344 vimconv_T conv; | |
1345 | |
1346 motion_type = *text++; | |
1347 --len; | |
1348 | |
1349 enc = text; | |
1350 text += STRLEN(text) + 1; | |
1351 len -= text - enc; | |
1352 | |
1353 /* If the encoding of the text is different from 'encoding', attempt | |
1354 * converting it. */ | |
1355 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1356 convert_setup(&conv, enc, p_enc); | |
1357 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1358 { | |
1359 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
1360 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1361 text = tmpbuf; | |
1362 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1363 } | |
1364 } | |
1365 #endif | |
1366 | |
1367 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1368 /* gtk_selection_data_get_text() handles all the nasty details | |
1369 * and targets and encodings etc. This rocks so hard. */ | |
1370 else | |
1371 { | |
1372 tmpbuf_utf8 = gtk_selection_data_get_text(data); | |
1373 if (tmpbuf_utf8 != NULL) | |
1374 { | |
1375 len = STRLEN(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
1376 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1377 { | |
1378 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, tmpbuf_utf8, &len); | |
1379 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1380 text = tmpbuf; | |
1381 } | |
1382 else | |
1383 text = tmpbuf_utf8; | |
1384 } | |
1904 | 1385 else if (len >= 2 && text[0] == 0xff && text[1] == 0xfe) |
1386 { | |
1387 vimconv_T conv; | |
1388 | |
1389 /* UTF-16, we get this for HTML */ | |
1390 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1391 convert_setup_ext(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE, p_enc, TRUE); | |
1392 | |
1393 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1394 { | |
1395 text += 2; | |
1396 len -= 2; | |
1397 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
1398 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1399 } | |
1400 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1401 text = tmpbuf; | |
1402 } | |
7 | 1403 } |
1404 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1405 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1406 else if (data->type == utf8_string_atom) | |
1407 { | |
1408 vimconv_T conv; | |
1409 | |
1410 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1411 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc); | |
1412 | |
1413 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1414 { | |
1415 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
1416 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1417 } | |
1418 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1419 text = tmpbuf; | |
1420 } | |
1421 # endif | |
1422 else if (data->type == compound_text_atom || data->type == text_atom) | |
1423 { | |
1424 char **list = NULL; | |
1425 int count; | |
1426 int i; | |
1427 unsigned tmplen = 0; | |
1428 | |
1429 count = gdk_text_property_to_text_list(data->type, data->format, | |
1430 data->data, data->length, | |
1431 &list); | |
1432 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
1433 tmplen += strlen(list[i]); | |
1434 | |
1435 tmpbuf = alloc(tmplen + 1); | |
1436 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1437 { | |
1438 tmpbuf[0] = NUL; | |
1439 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
1440 STRCAT(tmpbuf, list[i]); | |
1441 text = tmpbuf; | |
1442 len = tmplen; | |
1443 } | |
1444 | |
1445 if (list != NULL) | |
1446 gdk_free_text_list(list); | |
1447 } | |
1448 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1449 | |
2248 | 1450 /* Chop off any traiing NUL bytes. OpenOffice sends these. */ |
1451 while (len > 0 && text[len - 1] == NUL) | |
1452 --len; | |
1453 | |
7 | 1454 clip_yank_selection(motion_type, text, (long)len, cbd); |
1455 received_selection = RS_OK; | |
1456 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
1457 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1458 g_free(tmpbuf_utf8); | |
1459 #endif | |
1460 | |
1461 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1462 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1463 } | |
1464 | |
1465 /* | |
1466 * Prepare our selection data for passing it to the external selection | |
1467 * client. | |
1468 */ | |
1469 static void | |
1884 | 1470 selection_get_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
7 | 1471 GtkSelectionData *selection_data, |
1472 guint info, | |
1884 | 1473 guint time_ UNUSED, |
1474 gpointer user_data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1475 { |
1476 char_u *string; | |
1477 char_u *tmpbuf; | |
1478 long_u tmplen; | |
1479 int length; | |
1480 int motion_type; | |
1481 GdkAtom type; | |
1482 VimClipboard *cbd; | |
1483 | |
1484 if (selection_data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom) | |
1485 cbd = &clip_plus; | |
1486 else | |
1487 cbd = &clip_star; | |
1488 | |
1489 if (!cbd->owned) | |
1490 return; /* Shouldn't ever happen */ | |
1491 | |
1492 if (info != (guint)TARGET_STRING | |
1493 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 1494 && (!clip_html || info != (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
7 | 1495 && info != (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING |
1496 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIMENC | |
1497 #endif | |
1498 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIM | |
1499 && info != (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT | |
1500 && info != (guint)TARGET_TEXT) | |
1501 return; | |
1502 | |
1503 /* get the selection from the '*'/'+' register */ | |
1504 clip_get_selection(cbd); | |
1505 | |
1506 motion_type = clip_convert_selection(&string, &tmplen, cbd); | |
1507 if (motion_type < 0 || string == NULL) | |
1508 return; | |
1509 /* Due to int arguments we can't handle more than G_MAXINT. Also | |
1510 * reserve one extra byte for NUL or the motion type; just in case. | |
1511 * (Not that pasting 2G of text is ever going to work, but... ;-) */ | |
1512 length = MIN(tmplen, (long_u)(G_MAXINT - 1)); | |
1513 | |
1514 if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIM) | |
1515 { | |
1516 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + 1); | |
1517 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1518 { | |
1519 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
1520 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 1, string, (size_t)length); | |
1521 } | |
1522 /* For our own format, the first byte contains the motion type */ | |
1523 ++length; | |
1524 vim_free(string); | |
1525 string = tmpbuf; | |
1526 type = vim_atom; | |
1527 } | |
1528 | |
1529 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 1530 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_HTML) |
1531 { | |
1532 vimconv_T conv; | |
1533 | |
1534 /* Since we get utf-16, we probably should set it as well. */ | |
1535 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1536 convert_setup_ext(&conv, p_enc, TRUE, (char_u *)"utf-16le", FALSE); | |
1537 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1538 { | |
1539 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length); | |
1540 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1541 vim_free(string); | |
1542 string = tmpbuf; | |
1543 } | |
1544 | |
1545 /* Prepend the BOM: "fffe" */ | |
1546 if (string != NULL) | |
1547 { | |
1548 tmpbuf = alloc(length + 2); | |
1549 tmpbuf[0] = 0xff; | |
1550 tmpbuf[1] = 0xfe; | |
1551 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
1552 vim_free(string); | |
1553 string = tmpbuf; | |
1554 length += 2; | |
1555 | |
1556 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
1557 selection_data->format = 16; /* 16 bits per char */ | |
1558 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, html_atom, 16, | |
1559 string, length); | |
1560 vim_free(string); | |
1561 } | |
1562 return; | |
1563 } | |
7 | 1564 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIMENC) |
1565 { | |
1566 int l = STRLEN(p_enc); | |
1567 | |
1568 /* contents: motion_type 'encoding' NUL text */ | |
1569 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + l + 2); | |
1570 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1571 { | |
1572 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type; | |
1573 STRCPY(tmpbuf + 1, p_enc); | |
1574 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + l + 2, string, (size_t)length); | |
1575 } | |
1576 length += l + 2; | |
1577 vim_free(string); | |
1578 string = tmpbuf; | |
1579 type = vimenc_atom; | |
1580 } | |
1581 #endif | |
1582 | |
1583 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1584 /* gtk_selection_data_set_text() handles everything for us. This is | |
1585 * so easy and simple and cool, it'd be insane not to use it. */ | |
1586 else | |
1587 { | |
1588 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1589 { | |
1590 tmpbuf = string_convert(&output_conv, string, &length); | |
1591 vim_free(string); | |
1592 if (tmpbuf == NULL) | |
1593 return; | |
1594 string = tmpbuf; | |
1595 } | |
1596 /* Validate the string to avoid runtime warnings */ | |
1597 if (g_utf8_validate((const char *)string, (gssize)length, NULL)) | |
1598 { | |
1599 gtk_selection_data_set_text(selection_data, | |
1600 (const char *)string, length); | |
1601 } | |
1602 vim_free(string); | |
1603 return; | |
1604 } | |
1605 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1606 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1607 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING) | |
1608 { | |
1609 vimconv_T conv; | |
1610 | |
1611 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
1612 convert_setup(&conv, p_enc, (char_u *)"utf-8"); | |
1613 | |
1614 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
1615 { | |
1616 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length); | |
1617 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
1618 vim_free(string); | |
1619 string = tmpbuf; | |
1620 } | |
1621 type = utf8_string_atom; | |
1622 } | |
1623 # endif | |
1624 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT | |
1625 || info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT) | |
1626 { | |
1627 int format; | |
1628 | |
1629 /* Copy the string to ensure NUL-termination */ | |
1630 tmpbuf = vim_strnsave(string, length); | |
1631 vim_free(string); | |
1632 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
1633 { | |
1634 gdk_string_to_compound_text((const char *)tmpbuf, | |
1635 &type, &format, &string, &length); | |
1636 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
1637 selection_data->type = type; | |
1638 selection_data->format = format; | |
1639 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, format, string, length); | |
1640 gdk_free_compound_text(string); | |
1641 } | |
1642 return; | |
1643 } | |
1644 else | |
1645 { | |
1646 type = GDK_TARGET_STRING; | |
1647 } | |
1648 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1649 | |
1650 if (string != NULL) | |
1651 { | |
1652 selection_data->type = selection_data->target; | |
1653 selection_data->format = 8; /* 8 bits per char */ | |
1654 | |
1655 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, 8, string, length); | |
1656 vim_free(string); | |
1657 } | |
1658 } | |
1659 | |
1660 /* | |
1661 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced. | |
1662 * Return OK or FAIL. | |
1663 */ | |
1664 int | |
1665 gui_mch_init_check(void) | |
1666 { | |
1667 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1226 | 1668 /* This is needed to make the locale handling consistent between the GUI |
7 | 1669 * and the rest of VIM. */ |
1670 gtk_set_locale(); | |
1671 #endif | |
1672 | |
1673 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
1674 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
1675 using_gnome = 1; | |
1676 #endif | |
1677 | |
1678 /* Don't use gtk_init() or gnome_init(), it exits on failure. */ | |
1679 if (!gtk_init_check(&gui_argc, &gui_argv)) | |
1680 { | |
1681 gui.dying = TRUE; | |
1666 | 1682 EMSG(_((char *)e_opendisp)); |
7 | 1683 return FAIL; |
1684 } | |
1685 | |
1686 return OK; | |
1687 } | |
1688 | |
1689 | |
1690 /**************************************************************************** | |
1691 * Mouse handling callbacks | |
1692 */ | |
1693 | |
1694 | |
1695 static guint mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
1696 static int mouse_timed_out = TRUE; | |
1697 | |
1698 /* | |
1699 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button | |
1700 */ | |
1701 static gint | |
1702 mouse_click_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
1703 { | |
1704 /* we don't use this information currently */ | |
1705 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
1706 | |
1707 *timed_out = TRUE; | |
1708 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
1709 } | |
1710 | |
1711 static guint motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
1712 static int motion_repeat_offset = FALSE; | |
1713 static gint motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer); | |
1714 | |
1715 static void | |
1716 process_motion_notify(int x, int y, GdkModifierType state) | |
1717 { | |
1718 int button; | |
1719 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
1720 | |
1721 button = (state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
1722 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
1723 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK)) | |
1724 ? MOUSE_DRAG : ' '; | |
1725 | |
1726 /* If our pointer is currently hidden, then we should show it. */ | |
1727 gui_mch_mousehide(FALSE); | |
1728 | |
1729 /* Just moving the rodent above the drawing area without any button | |
1730 * being pressed. */ | |
1731 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG) | |
1732 { | |
1733 gui_mouse_moved(x, y); | |
1734 return; | |
1735 } | |
1736 | |
1737 /* translate modifier coding between the main engine and GTK */ | |
179 | 1738 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
7 | 1739 |
1226 | 1740 /* inform the editor engine about the occurrence of this event */ |
7 | 1741 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); |
1742 | |
1743 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1744 gtk_main_quit(); | |
1745 | |
1746 /* | |
1747 * Auto repeat timer handling. | |
1748 */ | |
1749 if (x < 0 || y < 0 | |
1750 || x >= gui.drawarea->allocation.width | |
1751 || y >= gui.drawarea->allocation.height) | |
1752 { | |
1753 | |
1754 int dx; | |
1755 int dy; | |
1756 int offshoot; | |
1757 int delay = 10; | |
1758 | |
1759 /* Calculate the maximal distance of the cursor from the drawing area. | |
1760 * (offshoot can't become negative here!). | |
1761 */ | |
1762 dx = x < 0 ? -x : x - gui.drawarea->allocation.width; | |
1763 dy = y < 0 ? -y : y - gui.drawarea->allocation.height; | |
1764 | |
1765 offshoot = dx > dy ? dx : dy; | |
1766 | |
1884 | 1767 /* Make a linearly decaying timer delay with a threshold of 5 at a |
7 | 1768 * distance of 127 pixels from the main window. |
1769 * | |
1770 * One could think endlessly about the most ergonomic variant here. | |
1771 * For example it could make sense to calculate the distance from the | |
1772 * drags start instead... | |
1773 * | |
1774 * Maybe a parabolic interpolation would suite us better here too... | |
1775 */ | |
1776 if (offshoot > 127) | |
1777 { | |
1778 /* 5 appears to be somehow near to my perceptual limits :-). */ | |
1779 delay = 5; | |
1780 } | |
1781 else | |
1782 { | |
1783 delay = (130 * (127 - offshoot)) / 127 + 5; | |
1784 } | |
1785 | |
1786 /* shoot again */ | |
1787 if (!motion_repeat_timer) | |
1788 motion_repeat_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)delay, | |
1789 motion_repeat_timer_cb, NULL); | |
1790 } | |
1791 } | |
1792 | |
1793 /* | |
1794 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button. | |
1795 */ | |
1796 static gint | |
1884 | 1797 motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 1798 { |
1799 int x; | |
1800 int y; | |
1801 GdkModifierType state; | |
1802 | |
1803 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
1804 | |
1805 if (!(state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK | | |
1806 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK | | |
1807 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK))) | |
1808 { | |
1809 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
1810 return FALSE; | |
1811 } | |
1812 | |
1813 /* If there already is a mouse click in the input buffer, wait another | |
1814 * time (otherwise we would create a backlog of clicks) */ | |
1815 if (vim_used_in_input_buf() > 10) | |
1816 return TRUE; | |
1817 | |
1818 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
1819 | |
1820 /* | |
1821 * Fake a motion event. | |
1822 * Trick: Pretend the mouse moved to the next character on every other | |
1823 * event, otherwise drag events will be discarded, because they are still | |
1824 * in the same character. | |
1825 */ | |
1826 if (motion_repeat_offset) | |
1827 x += gui.char_width; | |
1828 | |
1829 motion_repeat_offset = !motion_repeat_offset; | |
1830 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
1831 | |
1832 /* Don't happen again. We will get reinstalled in the synthetic event | |
1833 * if needed -- thus repeating should still work. */ | |
1834 return FALSE; | |
1835 } | |
1836 | |
1837 static gint | |
1884 | 1838 motion_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
1839 GdkEventMotion *event, | |
1840 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1841 { |
1842 if (event->is_hint) | |
1843 { | |
1844 int x; | |
1845 int y; | |
1846 GdkModifierType state; | |
1847 | |
1848 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, &x, &y, &state); | |
1849 process_motion_notify(x, y, state); | |
1850 } | |
1851 else | |
1852 { | |
1853 process_motion_notify((int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
1854 (GdkModifierType)event->state); | |
1855 } | |
1856 | |
1857 return TRUE; /* handled */ | |
1858 } | |
1859 | |
1860 | |
1861 /* | |
1862 * Mouse button handling. Note please that we are capturing multiple click's | |
1863 * by our own timeout mechanism instead of the one provided by GTK+ itself. | |
1864 * This is due to the way the generic VIM code is recognizing multiple clicks. | |
1865 */ | |
1866 static gint | |
1884 | 1867 button_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
1868 GdkEventButton *event, | |
1869 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1870 { |
1871 int button; | |
1872 int repeated_click = FALSE; | |
1873 int x, y; | |
1874 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
1875 | |
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1876 clipboard_event_time = event->time; |
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1877 |
7 | 1878 /* Make sure we have focus now we've been selected */ |
1879 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
1880 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
1881 | |
1882 /* | |
1883 * Don't let additional events about multiple clicks send by GTK to us | |
1884 * after the initial button press event confuse us. | |
1885 */ | |
1886 if (event->type != GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
1887 return FALSE; | |
1888 | |
1889 x = event->x; | |
1890 y = event->y; | |
1891 | |
1892 /* Handle multiple clicks */ | |
1893 if (!mouse_timed_out && mouse_click_timer) | |
1894 { | |
1895 gtk_timeout_remove(mouse_click_timer); | |
1896 mouse_click_timer = 0; | |
1897 repeated_click = TRUE; | |
1898 } | |
1899 | |
1900 mouse_timed_out = FALSE; | |
1901 mouse_click_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)p_mouset, | |
1902 mouse_click_timer_cb, &mouse_timed_out); | |
1903 | |
1904 switch (event->button) | |
1905 { | |
1906 case 1: | |
1907 button = MOUSE_LEFT; | |
1908 break; | |
1909 case 2: | |
1910 button = MOUSE_MIDDLE; | |
1911 break; | |
1912 case 3: | |
1913 button = MOUSE_RIGHT; | |
1914 break; | |
1915 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1916 case 4: | |
1917 button = MOUSE_4; | |
1918 break; | |
1919 case 5: | |
1920 button = MOUSE_5; | |
1921 break; | |
1922 #endif | |
1923 default: | |
1924 return FALSE; /* Unknown button */ | |
1925 } | |
1926 | |
1927 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
1928 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
1929 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
1930 xim_reset(); | |
1931 #endif | |
1932 | |
179 | 1933 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
7 | 1934 |
1935 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, vim_modifiers); | |
1936 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1937 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */ | |
1938 | |
1939 return TRUE; | |
1940 } | |
1941 | |
1942 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
1943 /* | |
1944 * GTK+ 2 doesn't handle mouse buttons 4, 5, 6 and 7 the same way as GTK+ 1. | |
1945 * Instead, it abstracts scrolling via the new GdkEventScroll. | |
1946 */ | |
1947 static gboolean | |
1884 | 1948 scroll_event(GtkWidget *widget, |
1949 GdkEventScroll *event, | |
1950 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1951 { |
1952 int button; | |
179 | 1953 int_u vim_modifiers; |
7 | 1954 |
1955 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget)) | |
1956 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget); | |
1957 | |
1958 switch (event->direction) | |
1959 { | |
1960 case GDK_SCROLL_UP: | |
1961 button = MOUSE_4; | |
1962 break; | |
1963 case GDK_SCROLL_DOWN: | |
1964 button = MOUSE_5; | |
1965 break; | |
1966 default: /* We don't care about left and right... Yet. */ | |
1967 return FALSE; | |
1968 } | |
1969 | |
1970 # ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
1971 /* cancel any preediting */ | |
1972 if (im_is_preediting()) | |
1973 xim_reset(); | |
1974 # endif | |
1975 | |
179 | 1976 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
7 | 1977 |
1978 gui_send_mouse_event(button, (int)event->x, (int)event->y, | |
1979 FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
1980 | |
1981 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
1982 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */ | |
1983 | |
1984 return TRUE; | |
1985 } | |
1986 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
1987 | |
1988 | |
1989 static gint | |
1884 | 1990 button_release_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
1991 GdkEventButton *event, | |
1992 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 1993 { |
1994 int x, y; | |
1995 int_u vim_modifiers; | |
1996 | |
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1997 clipboard_event_time = event->time; |
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
1998 |
7 | 1999 /* Remove any motion "machine gun" timers used for automatic further |
2000 extension of allocation areas if outside of the applications window | |
2001 area .*/ | |
2002 if (motion_repeat_timer) | |
2003 { | |
2004 gtk_timeout_remove(motion_repeat_timer); | |
2005 motion_repeat_timer = 0; | |
2006 } | |
2007 | |
2008 x = event->x; | |
2009 y = event->y; | |
2010 | |
179 | 2011 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state); |
7 | 2012 |
2013 gui_send_mouse_event(MOUSE_RELEASE, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers); | |
2014 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
2015 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure it will be handled immediately */ | |
2016 | |
2017 return TRUE; | |
2018 } | |
2019 | |
2020 | |
2021 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
2022 /**************************************************************************** | |
2023 * Drag aNd Drop support handlers. | |
2024 */ | |
2025 | |
2026 /* | |
2027 * Count how many items there may be and separate them with a NUL. | |
2028 * Apparently the items are separated with \r\n. This is not documented, | |
2029 * thus be careful not to go past the end. Also allow separation with | |
2030 * NUL characters. | |
2031 */ | |
2032 static int | |
2033 count_and_decode_uri_list(char_u *out, char_u *raw, int len) | |
2034 { | |
2035 int i; | |
2036 char_u *p = out; | |
2037 int count = 0; | |
2038 | |
2039 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
2040 { | |
2041 if (raw[i] == NUL || raw[i] == '\n' || raw[i] == '\r') | |
2042 { | |
2043 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
2044 { | |
2045 ++count; | |
2046 *p++ = NUL; | |
2047 } | |
2048 } | |
2049 else if (raw[i] == '%' && i + 2 < len && hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1) > 0) | |
2050 { | |
2051 *p++ = hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1); | |
2052 i += 2; | |
2053 } | |
2054 else | |
2055 *p++ = raw[i]; | |
2056 } | |
2057 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL) | |
2058 { | |
2059 *p = NUL; /* last item didn't have \r or \n */ | |
2060 ++count; | |
2061 } | |
2062 return count; | |
2063 } | |
2064 | |
2065 /* | |
2066 * Parse NUL separated "src" strings. Make it an array "outlist" form. On | |
2067 * this process, URI which protocol is not "file:" are removed. Return | |
2068 * length of array (less than "max"). | |
2069 */ | |
2070 static int | |
2071 filter_uri_list(char_u **outlist, int max, char_u *src) | |
2072 { | |
2073 int i, j; | |
2074 | |
2075 for (i = j = 0; i < max; ++i) | |
2076 { | |
2077 outlist[i] = NULL; | |
2078 if (STRNCMP(src, "file:", 5) == 0) | |
2079 { | |
2080 src += 5; | |
2081 if (STRNCMP(src, "//localhost", 11) == 0) | |
2082 src += 11; | |
2083 while (src[0] == '/' && src[1] == '/') | |
2084 ++src; | |
2085 outlist[j++] = vim_strsave(src); | |
2086 } | |
2087 src += STRLEN(src) + 1; | |
2088 } | |
2089 return j; | |
2090 } | |
2091 | |
2092 static char_u ** | |
2093 parse_uri_list(int *count, char_u *data, int len) | |
2094 { | |
2095 int n = 0; | |
2096 char_u *tmp = NULL; | |
2097 char_u **array = NULL;; | |
2098 | |
2099 if (data != NULL && len > 0 && (tmp = (char_u *)alloc(len + 1)) != NULL) | |
2100 { | |
2101 n = count_and_decode_uri_list(tmp, data, len); | |
2102 if (n > 0 && (array = (char_u **)alloc(n * sizeof(char_u *))) != NULL) | |
2103 n = filter_uri_list(array, n, tmp); | |
2104 } | |
2105 vim_free(tmp); | |
2106 *count = n; | |
2107 return array; | |
2108 } | |
2109 | |
2110 static void | |
2111 drag_handle_uri_list(GdkDragContext *context, | |
2112 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
2113 guint time_, | |
2114 GdkModifierType state, | |
2115 gint x, | |
2116 gint y) | |
2117 { | |
2118 char_u **fnames; | |
2119 int nfiles = 0; | |
2120 | |
2121 fnames = parse_uri_list(&nfiles, data->data, data->length); | |
2122 | |
2123 if (fnames != NULL && nfiles > 0) | |
2124 { | |
179 | 2125 int_u modifiers; |
7 | 2126 |
2127 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
2128 | |
179 | 2129 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state); |
7 | 2130 |
2131 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, nfiles); | |
2132 } | |
840 | 2133 else |
2134 vim_free(fnames); | |
7 | 2135 } |
2136 | |
2137 static void | |
2138 drag_handle_text(GdkDragContext *context, | |
2139 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
2140 guint time_, | |
2141 GdkModifierType state) | |
2142 { | |
2143 char_u dropkey[6] = {CSI, KS_MODIFIER, 0, CSI, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_DROP}; | |
2144 char_u *text; | |
2145 int len; | |
2146 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2147 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL; | |
2148 # endif | |
2149 | |
2150 text = data->data; | |
2151 len = data->length; | |
2152 | |
2153 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2154 if (data->type == utf8_string_atom) | |
2155 { | |
2156 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2157 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
2158 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, text, &len); | |
2159 # else | |
2160 vimconv_T conv; | |
2161 | |
2162 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE; | |
2163 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc); | |
2164 | |
2165 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
2166 { | |
2167 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len); | |
2168 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL); | |
2169 } | |
2170 # endif | |
2171 if (tmpbuf != NULL) | |
2172 text = tmpbuf; | |
2173 } | |
2174 # endif /* FEAT_MBYTE */ | |
2175 | |
2176 dnd_yank_drag_data(text, (long)len); | |
2177 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */ | |
2178 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
2179 vim_free(tmpbuf); | |
2180 # endif | |
2181 | |
179 | 2182 dropkey[2] = modifiers_gdk2vim(state); |
7 | 2183 |
2184 if (dropkey[2] != 0) | |
2185 add_to_input_buf(dropkey, (int)sizeof(dropkey)); | |
2186 else | |
2187 add_to_input_buf(dropkey + 3, (int)(sizeof(dropkey) - 3)); | |
2188 | |
2189 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
2190 gtk_main_quit(); | |
2191 } | |
2192 | |
2193 /* | |
2194 * DND receiver. | |
2195 */ | |
2196 static void | |
2197 drag_data_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
2198 GdkDragContext *context, | |
2199 gint x, | |
2200 gint y, | |
2201 GtkSelectionData *data, | |
2202 guint info, | |
2203 guint time_, | |
1884 | 2204 gpointer user_data UNUSED) |
7 | 2205 { |
2206 GdkModifierType state; | |
2207 | |
2208 /* Guard against trash */ | |
2209 if (data->data == NULL | |
2210 || data->length <= 0 | |
2211 || data->format != 8 | |
2212 || data->data[data->length] != '\0') | |
2213 { | |
2214 gtk_drag_finish(context, FALSE, FALSE, time_); | |
2215 return; | |
2216 } | |
2217 | |
2218 /* Get the current modifier state for proper distinguishment between | |
2219 * different operations later. */ | |
2220 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, NULL, NULL, &state); | |
2221 | |
2222 /* Not sure about the role of "text/plain" here... */ | |
2223 if (info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST) | |
2224 drag_handle_uri_list(context, data, time_, state, x, y); | |
2225 else | |
2226 drag_handle_text(context, data, time_, state); | |
2227 | |
2228 } | |
2229 #endif /* FEAT_DND */ | |
2230 | |
2231 | |
2232 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
2233 /* | |
2234 * GnomeClient interact callback. Check for unsaved buffers that cannot | |
2235 * be abandoned and pop up a dialog asking the user for confirmation if | |
2236 * necessary. | |
2237 */ | |
2238 static void | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2239 sm_client_check_changed_any(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, |
7 | 2240 gint key, |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2241 GnomeDialogType type UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2242 gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2243 { |
2244 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod; | |
2245 gboolean shutdown_cancelled; | |
2246 | |
2247 save_cmdmod = cmdmod; | |
2248 | |
2249 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE | |
2250 cmdmod.browse = TRUE; | |
2251 # endif | |
2252 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG) | |
2253 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE; | |
2254 # endif | |
2255 /* | |
2256 * If there are changed buffers, present the user with | |
2257 * a dialog if possible, otherwise give an error message. | |
2258 */ | |
2259 shutdown_cancelled = check_changed_any(FALSE); | |
2260 | |
2261 exiting = FALSE; | |
2262 cmdmod = save_cmdmod; | |
2263 setcursor(); /* position the cursor */ | |
2264 out_flush(); | |
2265 /* | |
2266 * If the user hit the [Cancel] button the whole shutdown | |
2267 * will be cancelled. Wow, quite powerful feature (: | |
2268 */ | |
2269 gnome_interaction_key_return(key, shutdown_cancelled); | |
2270 } | |
2271 | |
2272 /* | |
2273 * Generate a script that can be used to restore the current editing session. | |
2274 * Save the value of v:this_session before running :mksession in order to make | |
2275 * automagic session save fully transparent. Return TRUE on success. | |
2276 */ | |
2277 static int | |
2278 write_session_file(char_u *filename) | |
2279 { | |
2280 char_u *escaped_filename; | |
2281 char *mksession_cmdline; | |
2282 unsigned int save_ssop_flags; | |
2283 int failed; | |
2284 | |
2285 /* | |
2286 * Build an ex command line to create a script that restores the current | |
2287 * session if executed. Escape the filename to avoid nasty surprises. | |
2288 */ | |
2289 escaped_filename = vim_strsave_escaped(filename, escape_chars); | |
2290 if (escaped_filename == NULL) | |
2291 return FALSE; | |
1296 | 2292 mksession_cmdline = g_strconcat("mksession ", (char *)escaped_filename, |
2293 NULL); | |
7 | 2294 vim_free(escaped_filename); |
1296 | 2295 |
7 | 2296 /* |
2297 * Use a reasonable hardcoded set of 'sessionoptions' flags to avoid | |
2298 * unpredictable effects when the session is saved automatically. Also, | |
2299 * we definitely need SSOP_GLOBALS to be able to restore v:this_session. | |
2300 * Don't use SSOP_BUFFERS to prevent the buffer list from becoming | |
2301 * enormously large if the GNOME session feature is used regularly. | |
2302 */ | |
2303 save_ssop_flags = ssop_flags; | |
2304 ssop_flags = (SSOP_BLANK|SSOP_CURDIR|SSOP_FOLDS|SSOP_GLOBALS | |
1296 | 2305 |SSOP_HELP|SSOP_OPTIONS|SSOP_WINSIZE|SSOP_TABPAGES); |
7 | 2306 |
2307 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let Save_VV_this_session = v:this_session"); | |
2308 failed = (do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)mksession_cmdline) == FAIL); | |
2309 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session"); | |
150 | 2310 do_unlet((char_u *)"Save_VV_this_session", TRUE); |
7 | 2311 |
2312 ssop_flags = save_ssop_flags; | |
2313 g_free(mksession_cmdline); | |
2314 /* | |
2315 * Reopen the file and append a command to restore v:this_session, | |
2316 * as if this save never happened. This is to avoid conflicts with | |
2317 * the user's own sessions. FIXME: It's probably less hackish to add | |
2318 * a "stealth" flag to 'sessionoptions' -- gotta ask Bram. | |
2319 */ | |
2320 if (!failed) | |
2321 { | |
2322 FILE *fd; | |
2323 | |
2324 fd = open_exfile(filename, TRUE, APPENDBIN); | |
2325 | |
2326 failed = (fd == NULL | |
2327 || put_line(fd, "let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL | |
2328 || put_line(fd, "unlet Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL); | |
2329 | |
2330 if (fd != NULL && fclose(fd) != 0) | |
2331 failed = TRUE; | |
2332 | |
2333 if (failed) | |
2334 mch_remove(filename); | |
2335 } | |
2336 | |
2337 return !failed; | |
2338 } | |
2339 | |
2340 /* | |
2341 * "save_yourself" signal handler. Initiate an interaction to ask the user | |
2342 * for confirmation if necessary. Save the current editing session and tell | |
2343 * the session manager how to restart Vim. | |
2344 */ | |
2345 static gboolean | |
2346 sm_client_save_yourself(GnomeClient *client, | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2347 gint phase UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2348 GnomeSaveStyle save_style UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2349 gboolean shutdown UNUSED, |
7 | 2350 GnomeInteractStyle interact_style, |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2351 gboolean fast UNUSED, |
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2352 gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2353 { |
2354 static const char suffix[] = "-session.vim"; | |
2355 char *session_file; | |
2356 unsigned int len; | |
2357 gboolean success; | |
2358 | |
2359 /* Always request an interaction if possible. check_changed_any() | |
2360 * won't actually show a dialog unless any buffers have been modified. | |
2361 * There doesn't seem to be an obvious way to check that without | |
2362 * automatically firing the dialog. Anyway, it works just fine. */ | |
2363 if (interact_style == GNOME_INTERACT_ANY) | |
2364 gnome_client_request_interaction(client, GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL, | |
2365 &sm_client_check_changed_any, | |
2366 NULL); | |
2367 out_flush(); | |
2368 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
2369 | |
2370 /* The path is unique for each session save. We do neither know nor care | |
2371 * which session script will actually be used later. This decision is in | |
2372 * the domain of the session manager. */ | |
2373 session_file = gnome_config_get_real_path( | |
2374 gnome_client_get_config_prefix(client)); | |
2375 len = strlen(session_file); | |
2376 | |
2377 if (len > 0 && session_file[len-1] == G_DIR_SEPARATOR) | |
2378 --len; /* get rid of the superfluous trailing '/' */ | |
2379 | |
2380 session_file = g_renew(char, session_file, len + sizeof(suffix)); | |
2381 memcpy(session_file + len, suffix, sizeof(suffix)); | |
2382 | |
2383 success = write_session_file((char_u *)session_file); | |
2384 | |
2385 if (success) | |
2386 { | |
2387 const char *argv[8]; | |
2388 int i; | |
2389 | |
2390 /* Tell the session manager how to wipe out the stored session data. | |
2391 * This isn't as dangerous as it looks, don't worry :) session_file | |
2392 * is a unique absolute filename. Usually it'll be something like | |
2393 * `/home/user/.gnome2/vim-XXXXXX-session.vim'. */ | |
2394 i = 0; | |
2395 argv[i++] = "rm"; | |
2396 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
2397 argv[i] = NULL; | |
2398 | |
2399 gnome_client_set_discard_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
2400 | |
2401 /* Tell the session manager how to restore the just saved session. | |
2402 * This is easily done thanks to Vim's -S option. Pass the -f flag | |
2403 * since there's no need to fork -- it might even cause confusion. | |
2404 * Also pass the window role to give the WM something to match on. | |
2405 * The role is set in gui_mch_open(), thus should _never_ be NULL. */ | |
2406 i = 0; | |
2407 argv[i++] = restart_command; | |
2408 argv[i++] = "-f"; | |
2409 argv[i++] = "-g"; | |
2410 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2411 argv[i++] = "--role"; | |
2412 argv[i++] = gtk_window_get_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
2413 # endif | |
2414 argv[i++] = "-S"; | |
2415 argv[i++] = session_file; | |
2416 argv[i] = NULL; | |
2417 | |
2418 gnome_client_set_restart_command(client, i, (char **)argv); | |
2419 gnome_client_set_clone_command(client, 0, NULL); | |
2420 } | |
2421 | |
2422 g_free(session_file); | |
2423 | |
2424 return success; | |
2425 } | |
2426 | |
2427 /* | |
2428 * Called when the session manager wants us to die. There isn't much to save | |
2429 * here since "save_yourself" has been emitted before (unless serious trouble | |
2430 * is happening). | |
2431 */ | |
2432 static void | |
2188
722e390945d7
Avoid warnings for unused arguments when compiling with Gnome.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2433 sm_client_die(GnomeClient *client UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2434 { |
2435 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
2436 full_screen = FALSE; | |
2437 | |
1666 | 2438 vim_strncpy(IObuff, (char_u *) |
419 | 2439 _("Vim: Received \"die\" request from session manager\n"), |
1666 | 2440 IOSIZE - 1); |
7 | 2441 preserve_exit(); |
2442 } | |
2443 | |
2444 /* | |
2445 * Connect our signal handlers to be notified on session save and shutdown. | |
2446 */ | |
2447 static void | |
2448 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
2449 { | |
2450 GnomeClient *client; | |
2451 | |
2452 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
2453 | |
2454 if (client != NULL) | |
2455 { | |
2456 /* Must use the deprecated gtk_signal_connect() for compatibility | |
2457 * with GNOME 1. Arrgh, zombies! */ | |
2458 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "save_yourself", | |
2459 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_save_yourself), NULL); | |
2460 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "die", | |
2461 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_die), NULL); | |
2462 } | |
2463 } | |
2464 | |
2465 #else /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
2466 | |
2467 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
2468 /* | |
2469 * GTK tells us that XSMP needs attention | |
2470 */ | |
2471 static gboolean | |
2472 local_xsmp_handle_requests(source, condition, data) | |
1884 | 2473 GIOChannel *source UNUSED; |
7 | 2474 GIOCondition condition; |
2475 gpointer data; | |
2476 { | |
2477 if (condition == G_IO_IN) | |
2478 { | |
2479 /* Do stuff; maybe close connection */ | |
2480 if (xsmp_handle_requests() == FAIL) | |
2481 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
2482 return TRUE; | |
2483 } | |
2484 /* Error */ | |
2485 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data); | |
2486 xsmp_close(); | |
2487 return TRUE; | |
2488 } | |
2489 # endif /* USE_XSMP */ | |
2490 | |
2491 /* | |
2492 * Setup the WM_PROTOCOLS to indicate we want the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. | |
2493 * This is an ugly use of X functions. GTK doesn't offer an alternative. | |
2494 */ | |
2495 static void | |
2496 setup_save_yourself(void) | |
2497 { | |
2498 Atom *existing_atoms = NULL; | |
2499 int count = 0; | |
2500 | |
2501 #ifdef USE_XSMP | |
2502 if (xsmp_icefd != -1) | |
2503 { | |
2504 /* | |
2505 * Use XSMP is preference to legacy WM_SAVE_YOURSELF; | |
2506 * set up GTK IO monitor | |
2507 */ | |
2508 GIOChannel *g_io = g_io_channel_unix_new(xsmp_icefd); | |
2509 | |
2510 g_io_add_watch(g_io, G_IO_IN | G_IO_ERR | G_IO_HUP, | |
2511 local_xsmp_handle_requests, (gpointer)g_io); | |
2512 } | |
2513 else | |
2514 #endif | |
2515 { | |
2516 /* Fall back to old method */ | |
2517 | |
2518 /* first get the existing value */ | |
2519 if (XGetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2520 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2521 &existing_atoms, &count)) | |
2522 { | |
2523 Atom *new_atoms; | |
2524 Atom save_yourself_xatom; | |
2525 int i; | |
2526 | |
2527 save_yourself_xatom = GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom); | |
2528 | |
2529 /* check if WM_SAVE_YOURSELF isn't there yet */ | |
2530 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i) | |
2531 if (existing_atoms[i] == save_yourself_xatom) | |
2532 break; | |
2533 | |
2534 if (i == count) | |
2535 { | |
2536 /* allocate an Atoms array which is one item longer */ | |
2537 new_atoms = (Atom *)alloc((unsigned)((count + 1) | |
2538 * sizeof(Atom))); | |
2539 if (new_atoms != NULL) | |
2540 { | |
2541 memcpy(new_atoms, existing_atoms, count * sizeof(Atom)); | |
2542 new_atoms[count] = save_yourself_xatom; | |
2543 XSetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2544 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2545 new_atoms, count + 1); | |
2546 vim_free(new_atoms); | |
2547 } | |
2548 } | |
2549 XFree(existing_atoms); | |
2550 } | |
2551 } | |
2552 } | |
2553 | |
2554 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2555 /* | |
2556 * Installing a global event filter seems to be the only way to catch | |
2557 * client messages of type WM_PROTOCOLS without overriding GDK's own | |
2558 * client message event filter. Well, that's still better than trying | |
2559 * to guess what the GDK filter had done if it had been invoked instead | |
2560 * (This is what we did for GTK+ 1.2, see below). | |
2561 * | |
2562 * GTK2_FIXME: This doesn't seem to work. For some reason we never | |
2563 * receive WM_SAVE_YOURSELF even though everything is set up correctly. | |
2564 * I have the nasty feeling modern session managers just don't send this | |
2565 * deprecated message anymore. Addition: confirmed by several people. | |
2566 * | |
2567 * The GNOME session support is much cooler anyway. Unlike this ugly | |
2568 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF hack it actually stores the session... And yes, | |
2569 * it should work with KDE as well. | |
2570 */ | |
2571 static GdkFilterReturn | |
1884 | 2572 global_event_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, |
2573 GdkEvent *event UNUSED, | |
2574 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2575 { |
2576 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev; | |
2577 | |
2578 if (xevent != NULL | |
2579 && xevent->type == ClientMessage | |
2580 && xevent->xclient.message_type == GET_X_ATOM(wm_protocols_atom) | |
1884 | 2581 && (long_u)xevent->xclient.data.l[0] |
2582 == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom)) | |
7 | 2583 { |
2584 out_flush(); | |
2585 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
2586 /* | |
2587 * Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager | |
2588 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be | |
2589 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. | |
2590 */ | |
2591 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2592 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2593 NULL, 0); | |
2594 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE; | |
2595 } | |
2596 | |
2597 return GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE; | |
2598 } | |
2599 | |
2600 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2601 | |
2602 /* | |
2603 * GDK handler for X ClientMessage events. | |
2604 */ | |
2605 static GdkFilterReturn | |
2606 gdk_wm_protocols_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data) | |
2607 { | |
2608 /* From example in gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter */ | |
2609 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev; | |
2610 | |
2611 if (xevent != NULL) | |
2612 { | |
2613 if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom)) | |
2614 { | |
2615 out_flush(); | |
2616 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */ | |
2617 | |
2618 /* Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager | |
2619 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be | |
2620 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. */ | |
2621 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2622 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2623 NULL, 0); | |
2624 } | |
2625 /* | |
2626 * Functionality from gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter; | |
2627 * Registering this filter apparently overrides the default GDK one, | |
2628 * so we need to perform its functionality. There seems no way to | |
2629 * register for WM_PROTOCOLS, and only process the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF | |
2630 * bit; it's all or nothing. Update: No, there is a way -- but it | |
2631 * only works with GTK+ 2 apparently. See above. | |
2632 */ | |
2633 else if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(gdk_wm_delete_window)) | |
2634 { | |
2635 event->any.type = GDK_DELETE; | |
2636 return GDK_FILTER_TRANSLATE; | |
2637 } | |
2638 } | |
2639 | |
2640 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE; | |
2641 } | |
2642 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2643 | |
2644 #endif /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */ | |
2645 | |
2646 | |
2647 /* | |
2648 * Setup the window icon & xcmdsrv comm after the main window has been realized. | |
2649 */ | |
2650 static void | |
1884 | 2651 mainwin_realize(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2652 { |
2653 /* If you get an error message here, you still need to unpack the runtime | |
2654 * archive! */ | |
2655 #ifdef magick | |
2656 # undef magick | |
2657 #endif | |
2658 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2659 /* A bit hackish, but avoids casting later and allows optimization */ | |
2660 # define static static const | |
2661 #endif | |
2662 #define magick vim32x32 | |
2663 #include "../runtime/vim32x32.xpm" | |
2664 #undef magick | |
2665 #define magick vim16x16 | |
2666 #include "../runtime/vim16x16.xpm" | |
2667 #undef magick | |
2668 #define magick vim48x48 | |
2669 #include "../runtime/vim48x48.xpm" | |
2670 #undef magick | |
2671 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2672 # undef static | |
2673 #endif | |
2674 | |
2675 /* When started with "--echo-wid" argument, write window ID on stdout. */ | |
2676 if (echo_wid_arg) | |
2677 { | |
2678 printf("WID: %ld\n", (long)GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
2679 fflush(stdout); | |
2680 } | |
2681 | |
2682 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_ICON) != NULL) | |
2683 { | |
2684 /* | |
2685 * Add an icon to the main window. For fun and convenience of the user. | |
2686 */ | |
2687 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2688 GList *icons = NULL; | |
2689 | |
2690 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim16x16)); | |
2691 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim32x32)); | |
2692 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim48x48)); | |
2693 | |
2694 gtk_window_set_icon_list(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), icons); | |
2695 | |
2696 g_list_foreach(icons, (GFunc)&g_object_unref, NULL); | |
2697 g_list_free(icons); | |
2698 | |
2699 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2700 | |
2701 GdkPixmap *icon; | |
2702 GdkBitmap *icon_mask = NULL; | |
2703 char **magick = vim32x32; | |
2704 Display *xdisplay; | |
2705 Window root_window; | |
2706 XIconSize *size; | |
2707 int number_sizes; | |
2708 /* | |
2709 * Adjust the icon to the preferences of the actual window manager. | |
1226 | 2710 * This is once again a workaround for a deficiency in GTK+ 1.2. |
7 | 2711 */ |
2712 xdisplay = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
2713 root_window = XRootWindow(xdisplay, DefaultScreen(xdisplay)); | |
2714 if (XGetIconSizes(xdisplay, root_window, &size, &number_sizes)) | |
2715 { | |
2716 if (number_sizes > 0) | |
2717 { | |
2718 if (size->max_height >= 48 && size->max_height >= 48) | |
2719 magick = vim48x48; | |
2720 else if (size->max_height >= 32 && size->max_height >= 32) | |
2721 magick = vim32x32; | |
2722 else if (size->max_height >= 16 && size->max_height >= 16) | |
2723 magick = vim16x16; | |
2724 } | |
2725 XFree(size); | |
2726 } | |
2727 icon = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d(gui.mainwin->window, | |
2728 &icon_mask, NULL, magick); | |
2729 if (icon != NULL) | |
2730 /* Note: for some reason gdk_window_set_icon() doesn't acquire | |
2731 * a reference on the pixmap, thus we _have_ to leak it. */ | |
2732 gdk_window_set_icon(gui.mainwin->window, NULL, icon, icon_mask); | |
2733 | |
2734 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
2735 } | |
2736 | |
2737 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
2738 /* Register a handler for WM_SAVE_YOURSELF with GDK's low-level X I/F */ | |
2739 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2740 gdk_window_add_filter(NULL, &global_event_filter, NULL); | |
2741 # else | |
2742 gdk_add_client_message_filter(wm_protocols_atom, | |
2743 &gdk_wm_protocols_filter, NULL); | |
2744 # endif | |
2745 #endif | |
2746 /* Setup to indicate to the window manager that we want to catch the | |
2747 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. For GNOME, this connects to the session | |
2748 * manager instead. */ | |
2749 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION) | |
2750 if (using_gnome) | |
2751 #endif | |
2752 setup_save_yourself(); | |
2753 | |
2754 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER | |
2755 if (serverName == NULL && serverDelayedStartName != NULL) | |
2756 { | |
2757 /* This is a :gui command in a plain vim with no previous server */ | |
2758 commWindow = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
2759 | |
2760 (void)serverRegisterName(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2761 serverDelayedStartName); | |
2762 } | |
2763 else | |
2764 { | |
2765 /* | |
2766 * Cannot handle "XLib-only" windows with gtk event routines, we'll | |
2767 * have to change the "server" registration to that of the main window | |
2768 * If we have not registered a name yet, remember the window | |
2769 */ | |
2770 serverChangeRegisteredWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
2771 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window)); | |
2772 } | |
2773 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK); | |
2774 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "property_notify_event", | |
2775 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(property_event), NULL); | |
2776 #endif | |
2777 } | |
2778 | |
2779 static GdkCursor * | |
2780 create_blank_pointer(void) | |
2781 { | |
2782 GdkWindow *root_window = NULL; | |
2783 GdkPixmap *blank_mask; | |
2784 GdkCursor *cursor; | |
2785 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
2786 char blank_data[] = { 0x0 }; | |
2787 | |
2788 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
2789 root_window = gtk_widget_get_root_window(gui.mainwin); | |
2790 #endif | |
2791 | |
2792 /* Create a pseudo blank pointer, which is in fact one pixel by one pixel | |
2793 * in size. */ | |
2794 blank_mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data(root_window, blank_data, 1, 1); | |
2795 cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap(blank_mask, blank_mask, | |
2796 &color, &color, 0, 0); | |
2797 gdk_bitmap_unref(blank_mask); | |
2798 | |
2799 return cursor; | |
2800 } | |
2801 | |
2802 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
2803 static void | |
2804 mainwin_screen_changed_cb(GtkWidget *widget, | |
1884 | 2805 GdkScreen *previous_screen UNUSED, |
2806 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2807 { |
2808 if (!gtk_widget_has_screen(widget)) | |
2809 return; | |
2810 | |
2811 /* | |
1226 | 2812 * Recreate the invisible mouse cursor. |
7 | 2813 */ |
2814 if (gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
2815 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
2816 | |
2817 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
2818 | |
2819 if (gui.pointer_hidden && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
2820 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
2821 | |
2822 /* | |
2823 * Create a new PangoContext for this screen, and initialize it | |
2824 * with the current font if necessary. | |
2825 */ | |
2826 if (gui.text_context != NULL) | |
2827 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
2828 | |
2829 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(widget); | |
2830 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
2831 | |
2832 if (gui.norm_font != NULL) | |
2833 { | |
38 | 2834 gui_mch_init_font(p_guifont, FALSE); |
814 | 2835 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, FALSE, RESIZE_BOTH); |
7 | 2836 } |
2837 } | |
2838 #endif /* HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD */ | |
2839 | |
2840 /* | |
2841 * After the drawing area comes up, we calculate all colors and create the | |
2842 * dummy blank cursor. | |
2843 * | |
2844 * Don't try to set any VIM scrollbar sizes anywhere here. I'm relying on the | |
2845 * fact that the main VIM engine doesn't take them into account anywhere. | |
2846 */ | |
2847 static void | |
1884 | 2848 drawarea_realize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2849 { |
2850 GtkWidget *sbar; | |
2851 | |
2852 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
2853 xim_init(); | |
2854 #endif | |
2855 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
2856 gui.text_gc = gdk_gc_new(gui.drawarea->window); | |
2857 | |
2858 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer(); | |
2859 if (gui.pointer_hidden) | |
2860 gdk_window_set_cursor(widget->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
2861 | |
2862 /* get the actual size of the scrollbars, if they are realized */ | |
2863 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].id; | |
2864 if (!sbar || (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT] | |
2865 && firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id)) | |
2866 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id; | |
2867 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.width) | |
2868 gui.scrollbar_width = sbar->allocation.width; | |
2869 | |
2870 sbar = gui.bottom_sbar.id; | |
2871 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.height) | |
2872 gui.scrollbar_height = sbar->allocation.height; | |
2873 } | |
2874 | |
2875 /* | |
2876 * Properly clean up on shutdown. | |
2877 */ | |
2878 static void | |
1884 | 2879 drawarea_unrealize_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 2880 { |
2881 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
2882 full_screen = FALSE; | |
2883 | |
2884 #ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
2885 im_shutdown(); | |
2886 #endif | |
2887 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
2888 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
2889 { | |
2890 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
2891 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
2892 } | |
2893 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
2894 { | |
2895 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
2896 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
2897 } | |
2898 g_object_unref(gui.text_context); | |
2899 gui.text_context = NULL; | |
2900 | |
2901 g_object_unref(gui.text_gc); | |
2902 gui.text_gc = NULL; | |
2903 | |
2904 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer); | |
2905 gui.blank_pointer = NULL; | |
2906 #else | |
2907 gdk_gc_unref(gui.text_gc); | |
2908 gui.text_gc = NULL; | |
2909 | |
2910 gdk_cursor_destroy(gui.blank_pointer); | |
2911 gui.blank_pointer = NULL; | |
2912 #endif | |
2913 } | |
2914 | |
2915 static void | |
1884 | 2916 drawarea_style_set_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
2917 GtkStyle *previous_style UNUSED, | |
2918 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2919 { |
2920 gui_mch_new_colors(); | |
2921 } | |
2922 | |
2923 /* | |
2924 * Callback routine for the "delete_event" signal on the toplevel window. | |
2925 * Tries to vim gracefully, or refuses to exit with changed buffers. | |
2926 */ | |
2927 static gint | |
1884 | 2928 delete_event_cb(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
2929 GdkEventAny *event UNUSED, | |
2930 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 2931 { |
2932 gui_shell_closed(); | |
2933 return TRUE; | |
2934 } | |
2935 | |
685 | 2936 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) |
2937 static int | |
2938 get_item_dimensions(GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation) | |
2939 { | |
2940 GtkOrientation item_orientation = GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL; | |
2941 | |
2942 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
2943 if (using_gnome && widget != NULL) | |
2944 { | |
2945 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
856 | 2946 GtkWidget *parent; |
685 | 2947 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; |
2948 | |
791 | 2949 parent = gtk_widget_get_parent(widget); |
856 | 2950 if (G_TYPE_FROM_INSTANCE(parent) == BONOBO_TYPE_DOCK_ITEM) |
2951 { | |
2952 /* Only menu & toolbar are dock items. Could tabline be? | |
2953 * Seem to be only the 2 defined in GNOME */ | |
2954 widget = parent; | |
2955 dockitem = BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM(widget); | |
2956 | |
2957 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating) | |
2958 return 0; | |
2959 item_orientation = bonobo_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem); | |
2960 } | |
685 | 2961 # else |
2962 GnomeDockItem *dockitem; | |
2963 | |
2964 widget = widget->parent; | |
2965 dockitem = GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(widget); | |
2966 | |
2967 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating) | |
2968 return 0; | |
2969 item_orientation = gnome_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem); | |
2970 # endif | |
2971 } | |
2972 #endif | |
2973 if (widget != NULL | |
2974 && item_orientation == orientation | |
2975 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(widget) | |
2976 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
2977 { | |
2978 if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL) | |
2979 return widget->allocation.height; | |
2980 else | |
2981 return widget->allocation.width; | |
2982 } | |
2983 return 0; | |
2984 } | |
2985 #endif | |
2986 | |
2987 static int | |
2988 get_menu_tool_width(void) | |
2989 { | |
2990 int width = 0; | |
2991 | |
2992 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME /* these are never vertical without GNOME */ | |
2993 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
2994 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
2995 # endif | |
2996 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
2997 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
2998 # endif | |
2999 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
782 | 3000 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
3001 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL); | |
685 | 3002 # endif |
3003 #endif | |
3004 | |
3005 return width; | |
3006 } | |
3007 | |
3008 static int | |
3009 get_menu_tool_height(void) | |
3010 { | |
3011 int height = 0; | |
3012 | |
3013 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
3014 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
3015 #endif | |
3016 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
3017 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
3018 #endif | |
3019 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE | |
782 | 3020 if (gui.tabline != NULL) |
3021 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL); | |
685 | 3022 #endif |
3023 | |
3024 return height; | |
3025 } | |
3026 | |
791 | 3027 /* This controls whether we can set the real window hints at |
3028 * start-up when in a GtkPlug. | |
3029 * 0 = normal processing (default) | |
3030 * 1 = init. hints set, no-one's tried to reset since last check | |
3031 * 2 = init. hints set, attempt made to change hints | |
3032 */ | |
3033 static int init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
3034 | |
685 | 3035 static void |
791 | 3036 update_window_manager_hints(int force_width, int force_height) |
685 | 3037 { |
3038 static int old_width = 0; | |
3039 static int old_height = 0; | |
791 | 3040 static int old_min_width = 0; |
3041 static int old_min_height = 0; | |
685 | 3042 static int old_char_width = 0; |
3043 static int old_char_height = 0; | |
3044 | |
3045 int width; | |
3046 int height; | |
791 | 3047 int min_width; |
3048 int min_height; | |
3049 | |
3050 /* At start-up, don't try to set the hints until the initial | |
3051 * values have been used (those that dictate our initial size) | |
1884 | 3052 * Let forced (i.e., correct) values through always. |
791 | 3053 */ |
3054 if (!(force_width && force_height) && init_window_hints_state > 0) | |
3055 { | |
856 | 3056 /* Don't do it! */ |
3057 init_window_hints_state = 2; | |
3058 return; | |
791 | 3059 } |
685 | 3060 |
3061 /* This also needs to be done when the main window isn't there yet, | |
3062 * otherwise the hints don't work. */ | |
3063 width = gui_get_base_width(); | |
3064 height = gui_get_base_height(); | |
3065 # ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
3066 height += tabline_height() * gui.char_height; | |
3067 # endif | |
3068 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3069 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
3070 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
3071 # endif | |
3072 | |
791 | 3073 /* GtkSockets use GtkPlug's [gui,mainwin] min-size hints to determine |
1226 | 3074 * their actual widget size. When we set our size ourselves (e.g., |
791 | 3075 * 'set columns=' or init. -geom) we briefly set the min. to the size |
3076 * we wish to be instead of the legitimate minimum so that we actually | |
3077 * resize correctly. | |
3078 */ | |
3079 if (force_width && force_height) | |
3080 { | |
856 | 3081 min_width = force_width; |
3082 min_height = force_height; | |
791 | 3083 } |
3084 else | |
3085 { | |
856 | 3086 min_width = width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width; |
3087 min_height = height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height; | |
791 | 3088 } |
3089 | |
685 | 3090 /* Avoid an expose event when the size didn't change. */ |
3091 if (width != old_width | |
3092 || height != old_height | |
856 | 3093 || min_width != old_min_width |
791 | 3094 || min_height != old_min_height |
685 | 3095 || gui.char_width != old_char_width |
3096 || gui.char_height != old_char_height) | |
3097 { | |
3098 GdkGeometry geometry; | |
3099 GdkWindowHints geometry_mask; | |
3100 | |
3101 geometry.width_inc = gui.char_width; | |
3102 geometry.height_inc = gui.char_height; | |
3103 geometry.base_width = width; | |
3104 geometry.base_height = height; | |
856 | 3105 geometry.min_width = min_width; |
3106 geometry.min_height = min_height; | |
685 | 3107 geometry_mask = GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE|GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC |
3108 |GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE; | |
3109 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3110 /* Using gui.formwin as geometry widget doesn't work as expected | |
3111 * with GTK+ 2 -- dunno why. Presumably all the resizing hacks | |
3112 * in Vim confuse GTK+. */ | |
3113 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.mainwin, | |
3114 &geometry, geometry_mask); | |
3115 # else | |
3116 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.formwin, | |
3117 &geometry, geometry_mask); | |
3118 # endif | |
856 | 3119 old_width = width; |
3120 old_height = height; | |
3121 old_min_width = min_width; | |
3122 old_min_height = min_height; | |
3123 old_char_width = gui.char_width; | |
3124 old_char_height = gui.char_height; | |
685 | 3125 } |
3126 } | |
3127 | |
7 | 3128 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR |
3129 | |
3130 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3131 /* | |
3132 * This extra effort wouldn't be necessary if we only used stock icons in the | |
3133 * toolbar, as we do for all builtin icons. But user-defined toolbar icons | |
3134 * shouldn't be treated differently, thus we do need this. | |
3135 */ | |
3136 static void | |
3137 icon_size_changed_foreach(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer user_data) | |
3138 { | |
3139 if (GTK_IS_IMAGE(widget)) | |
3140 { | |
3141 GtkImage *image = (GtkImage *)widget; | |
3142 | |
3143 /* User-defined icons are stored in a GtkIconSet */ | |
3144 if (gtk_image_get_storage_type(image) == GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET) | |
3145 { | |
3146 GtkIconSet *icon_set; | |
3147 GtkIconSize icon_size; | |
3148 | |
3149 gtk_image_get_icon_set(image, &icon_set, &icon_size); | |
3150 icon_size = (GtkIconSize)(long)user_data; | |
3151 | |
3152 gtk_icon_set_ref(icon_set); | |
3153 gtk_image_set_from_icon_set(image, icon_set, icon_size); | |
3154 gtk_icon_set_unref(icon_set); | |
3155 } | |
3156 } | |
3157 else if (GTK_IS_CONTAINER(widget)) | |
3158 { | |
3159 gtk_container_foreach((GtkContainer *)widget, | |
3160 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
3161 user_data); | |
3162 } | |
3163 } | |
3164 # endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
3165 | |
3166 static void | |
3167 set_toolbar_style(GtkToolbar *toolbar) | |
3168 { | |
3169 GtkToolbarStyle style; | |
3170 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3171 GtkIconSize size; | |
3172 GtkIconSize oldsize; | |
3173 # endif | |
3174 | |
3175 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3176 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) | |
3177 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ)) | |
3178 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ; | |
3179 else | |
3180 # endif | |
3181 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) | |
3182 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)) | |
3183 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH; | |
3184 else if (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TEXT) | |
3185 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT; | |
3186 else | |
3187 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS; | |
3188 | |
3189 gtk_toolbar_set_style(toolbar, style); | |
3190 gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips(toolbar, (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TOOLTIPS) != 0); | |
3191 | |
3192 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3193 switch (tbis_flags) | |
3194 { | |
3195 case TBIS_TINY: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU; break; | |
3196 case TBIS_SMALL: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR; break; | |
3197 case TBIS_MEDIUM: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON; break; | |
3198 case TBIS_LARGE: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR; break; | |
3199 default: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID; break; | |
3200 } | |
3201 oldsize = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
3202 | |
3203 if (size == GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID) | |
3204 { | |
3205 /* Let global user preferences decide the icon size. */ | |
3206 gtk_toolbar_unset_icon_size(toolbar); | |
3207 size = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar); | |
3208 } | |
3209 if (size != oldsize) | |
3210 { | |
3211 gtk_container_foreach(GTK_CONTAINER(toolbar), | |
3212 &icon_size_changed_foreach, | |
3213 GINT_TO_POINTER((int)size)); | |
3214 } | |
3215 gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size(toolbar, size); | |
3216 # endif | |
3217 } | |
3218 | |
3219 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
3220 | |
685 | 3221 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO) |
3222 static int ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; | |
689 | 3223 static GtkWidget *tabline_menu; |
846 | 3224 static GtkTooltips *tabline_tooltip; |
689 | 3225 static int clicked_page; /* page clicked in tab line */ |
3226 | |
3227 /* | |
3228 * Handle selecting an item in the tab line popup menu. | |
3229 */ | |
3230 static void | |
1884 | 3231 tabline_menu_handler(GtkMenuItem *item UNUSED, gpointer user_data) |
689 | 3232 { |
3233 /* Add the string cmd into input buffer */ | |
824 | 3234 send_tabline_menu_event(clicked_page, (int)(long)user_data); |
689 | 3235 |
3236 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
3237 gtk_main_quit(); | |
3238 } | |
3239 | |
851 | 3240 static void |
3241 add_tabline_menu_item(GtkWidget *menu, char_u *text, int resp) | |
3242 { | |
3243 GtkWidget *item; | |
3244 char_u *utf_text; | |
3245 | |
3246 utf_text = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(text); | |
3247 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label((const char *)utf_text); | |
3248 gtk_widget_show(item); | |
3249 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(utf_text); | |
3250 | |
3251 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item); | |
3252 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate", | |
3253 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler), | |
1660 | 3254 (gpointer)(long)resp); |
851 | 3255 } |
3256 | |
689 | 3257 /* |
3258 * Create a menu for the tab line. | |
3259 */ | |
3260 static GtkWidget * | |
3261 create_tabline_menu(void) | |
3262 { | |
851 | 3263 GtkWidget *menu; |
689 | 3264 |
3265 menu = gtk_menu_new(); | |
851 | 3266 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Close"), TABLINE_MENU_CLOSE); |
3267 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("New tab"), TABLINE_MENU_NEW); | |
3268 add_tabline_menu_item(menu, (char_u *)_("Open Tab..."), TABLINE_MENU_OPEN); | |
689 | 3269 |
3270 return menu; | |
3271 } | |
3272 | |
3273 static gboolean | |
3274 on_tabline_menu(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event) | |
3275 { | |
3276 /* Was this button press event ? */ | |
3277 if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS) | |
3278 { | |
3279 GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *)event; | |
3280 int x = bevent->x; | |
851 | 3281 int y = bevent->y; |
3282 GtkWidget *tabwidget; | |
3283 GdkWindow *tabwin; | |
689 | 3284 |
844 | 3285 /* When ignoring events return TRUE so that the selected page doesn't |
3286 * change. */ | |
3287 if (hold_gui_events | |
3288 # ifdef FEAT_CMDWIN | |
3289 || cmdwin_type != 0 | |
3290 # endif | |
3291 ) | |
3292 return TRUE; | |
3293 | |
851 | 3294 tabwin = gdk_window_at_pointer(&x, &y); |
3295 gdk_window_get_user_data(tabwin, (gpointer)&tabwidget); | |
3296 clicked_page = (int)(long)gtk_object_get_user_data( | |
3297 GTK_OBJECT(tabwidget)); | |
689 | 3298 |
3299 /* If the event was generated for 3rd button popup the menu. */ | |
3300 if (bevent->button == 3) | |
3301 { | |
3302 gtk_menu_popup(GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL, | |
3303 bevent->button, bevent->time); | |
3304 /* We handled the event. */ | |
3305 return TRUE; | |
3306 } | |
868 | 3307 else if (bevent->button == 1) |
693 | 3308 { |
868 | 3309 if (clicked_page == 0) |
3310 { | |
1394 | 3311 /* Click after all tabs moves to next tab page. When "x" is |
3312 * small guess it's the left button. */ | |
3313 if (send_tabline_event(x < 50 ? -1 : 0) && gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
868 | 3314 gtk_main_quit(); |
3315 } | |
3316 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3317 else | |
3318 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), | |
3319 clicked_page - 1); | |
3320 #endif | |
693 | 3321 } |
689 | 3322 } |
844 | 3323 |
689 | 3324 /* We didn't handle the event. */ |
3325 return FALSE; | |
3326 } | |
685 | 3327 |
3328 /* | |
3329 * Handle selecting one of the tabs. | |
3330 */ | |
3331 static void | |
3332 on_select_tab( | |
1884 | 3333 GtkNotebook *notebook UNUSED, |
3334 GtkNotebookPage *page UNUSED, | |
944 | 3335 gint idx, |
1884 | 3336 gpointer data UNUSED) |
685 | 3337 { |
3338 if (!ignore_tabline_evt) | |
693 | 3339 { |
944 | 3340 if (send_tabline_event(idx + 1) && gtk_main_level() > 0) |
693 | 3341 gtk_main_quit(); |
3342 } | |
685 | 3343 } |
3344 | |
714 | 3345 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 |
3346 static int showing_tabline = 0; | |
3347 #endif | |
3348 | |
685 | 3349 /* |
3350 * Show or hide the tabline. | |
3351 */ | |
3352 void | |
3353 gui_mch_show_tabline(int showit) | |
3354 { | |
3355 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
3356 return; | |
3357 | |
714 | 3358 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
3359 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */ | |
685 | 3360 if (!showit != !gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline))) |
714 | 3361 #else |
3362 if (!showit != !showing_tabline) | |
3363 #endif | |
685 | 3364 { |
708 | 3365 /* Note: this may cause a resize event */ |
685 | 3366 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), showit); |
791 | 3367 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
714 | 3368 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 |
3369 showing_tabline = showit; | |
3370 #endif | |
868 | 3371 if (showit) |
3372 GTK_WIDGET_UNSET_FLAGS(GTK_WIDGET(gui.tabline), GTK_CAN_FOCUS); | |
3373 } | |
3374 | |
3375 gui_mch_update(); | |
685 | 3376 } |
3377 | |
3378 /* | |
708 | 3379 * Return TRUE when tabline is displayed. |
3380 */ | |
3381 int | |
3382 gui_mch_showing_tabline(void) | |
3383 { | |
3384 return gui.tabline != NULL | |
714 | 3385 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
3386 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */ | |
3387 && gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) | |
3388 #else | |
3389 && showing_tabline | |
3390 #endif | |
3391 ; | |
708 | 3392 } |
3393 | |
3394 /* | |
685 | 3395 * Update the labels of the tabline. |
3396 */ | |
3397 void | |
3398 gui_mch_update_tabline(void) | |
3399 { | |
3400 GtkWidget *page; | |
846 | 3401 GtkWidget *event_box; |
685 | 3402 GtkWidget *label; |
3403 tabpage_T *tp; | |
3404 int nr = 0; | |
851 | 3405 int tab_num; |
685 | 3406 int curtabidx = 0; |
836 | 3407 char_u *labeltext; |
685 | 3408 |
3409 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
3410 return; | |
3411 | |
3412 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
3413 | |
3414 /* Add a label for each tab page. They all contain the same text area. */ | |
3415 for (tp = first_tabpage; tp != NULL; tp = tp->tp_next, ++nr) | |
3416 { | |
3417 if (tp == curtab) | |
3418 curtabidx = nr; | |
3419 | |
851 | 3420 tab_num = nr + 1; |
3421 | |
685 | 3422 page = gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); |
3423 if (page == NULL) | |
3424 { | |
3425 /* Add notebook page */ | |
3426 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); | |
3427 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
846 | 3428 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); |
3429 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
685 | 3430 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); |
851 | 3431 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
846 | 3432 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
685 | 3433 gtk_widget_show(label); |
3434 gtk_notebook_insert_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), | |
3435 page, | |
846 | 3436 event_box, |
685 | 3437 nr++); |
3438 } | |
3439 | |
846 | 3440 event_box = gtk_notebook_get_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page); |
1660 | 3441 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), |
3442 (gpointer)(long)tab_num); | |
846 | 3443 label = GTK_BIN(event_box)->child; |
839 | 3444 get_tabline_label(tp, FALSE); |
836 | 3445 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); |
846 | 3446 gtk_label_set_text(GTK_LABEL(label), (const char *)labeltext); |
836 | 3447 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); |
846 | 3448 |
3449 get_tabline_label(tp, TRUE); | |
3450 labeltext = CONVERT_TO_UTF8(NameBuff); | |
3451 gtk_tooltips_set_tip(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip), event_box, | |
3452 (const char *)labeltext, NULL); | |
3453 CONVERT_TO_UTF8_FREE(labeltext); | |
685 | 3454 } |
3455 | |
3456 /* Remove any old labels. */ | |
3457 while (gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr) != NULL) | |
3458 gtk_notebook_remove_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr); | |
3459 | |
3460 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != curtabidx) | |
856 | 3461 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), curtabidx); |
685 | 3462 |
851 | 3463 /* Make sure everything is in place before drawing text. */ |
3464 gui_mch_update(); | |
3465 | |
685 | 3466 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
3467 } | |
3468 | |
3469 /* | |
3470 * Set the current tab to "nr". First tab is 1. | |
3471 */ | |
3472 void | |
3473 gui_mch_set_curtab(nr) | |
3474 int nr; | |
3475 { | |
3476 if (gui.tabline == NULL) | |
3477 return; | |
3478 | |
3479 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE; | |
3480 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != nr - 1) | |
856 | 3481 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr - 1); |
685 | 3482 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE; |
3483 } | |
3484 | |
3485 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ | |
3486 | |
7 | 3487 /* |
2248 | 3488 * Add selection targets for PRIMARY and CLIPBOARD selections. |
3489 */ | |
3490 void | |
3491 gui_gtk_set_selection_targets(void) | |
3492 { | |
3493 int i, j = 0; | |
3494 int n_targets = N_SELECTION_TARGETS; | |
3495 GtkTargetEntry targets[N_SELECTION_TARGETS]; | |
3496 | |
3497 for (i = 0; i < (int)N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i) | |
3498 { | |
3499 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
3500 /* OpenOffice tries to use TARGET_HTML and fails when it doesn't | |
3501 * return something, instead of trying another target. Therefore only | |
3502 * offer TARGET_HTML when it works. */ | |
3503 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) | |
3504 n_targets--; | |
3505 else | |
3506 #endif | |
3507 targets[j++] = selection_targets[i]; | |
3508 } | |
3509 | |
3510 gtk_selection_clear_targets(gui.drawarea, (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY); | |
3511 gtk_selection_clear_targets(gui.drawarea, (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom); | |
3512 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
3513 (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY, | |
3514 targets, n_targets); | |
3515 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea, | |
3516 (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom, | |
3517 targets, n_targets); | |
3518 } | |
3519 | |
3520 /* | |
3521 * Set up for receiving DND items. | |
3522 */ | |
3523 void | |
3524 gui_gtk_set_dnd_targets(void) | |
3525 { | |
3526 int i, j = 0; | |
3527 int n_targets = N_DND_TARGETS; | |
3528 GtkTargetEntry targets[N_DND_TARGETS]; | |
3529 | |
3530 for (i = 0; i < (int)N_DND_TARGETS; ++i) | |
3531 { | |
3532 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
3533 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) | |
3534 n_targets--; | |
3535 else | |
3536 #endif | |
3537 targets[j++] = dnd_targets[i]; | |
3538 } | |
3539 | |
3540 gtk_drag_dest_unset(gui.drawarea); | |
3541 gtk_drag_dest_set(gui.drawarea, | |
3542 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL, | |
3543 targets, n_targets, | |
3544 GDK_ACTION_COPY); | |
3545 } | |
3546 | |
3547 /* | |
7 | 3548 * Initialize the GUI. Create all the windows, set up all the callbacks etc. |
3549 * Returns OK for success, FAIL when the GUI can't be started. | |
3550 */ | |
3551 int | |
3552 gui_mch_init(void) | |
3553 { | |
3554 GtkWidget *vbox; | |
3555 | |
3556 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3557 /* Initialize the GNOME libraries. gnome_program_init()/gnome_init() | |
3558 * exits on failure, but that's a non-issue because we already called | |
3559 * gtk_init_check() in gui_mch_init_check(). */ | |
3560 if (using_gnome) | |
3561 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3562 gnome_program_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, | |
3563 LIBGNOMEUI_MODULE, gui_argc, gui_argv, NULL); | |
3564 # else | |
3565 gnome_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, gui_argc, gui_argv); | |
3566 # endif | |
3567 #endif | |
3568 vim_free(gui_argv); | |
3569 gui_argv = NULL; | |
3570 | |
3571 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3572 # if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,3) | |
3573 /* Set the human-readable application name */ | |
3574 g_set_application_name("Vim"); | |
3575 # endif | |
3576 /* | |
3577 * Force UTF-8 output no matter what the value of 'encoding' is. | |
3578 * did_set_string_option() in option.c prohibits changing 'termencoding' | |
3579 * to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is in use. | |
3580 */ | |
3581 set_option_value((char_u *)"termencoding", 0L, (char_u *)"utf-8", 0); | |
3582 | |
3583 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
3584 gui_gtk_register_stock_icons(); | |
3585 # endif | |
3586 /* FIXME: Need to install the classic icons and a gtkrc.classic file. | |
3587 * The hard part is deciding install locations and the Makefile magic. */ | |
3588 # if 0 | |
3589 gtk_rc_parse("gtkrc"); | |
3590 # endif | |
3591 #endif | |
3592 | |
3593 /* Initialize values */ | |
3594 gui.border_width = 2; | |
3595 gui.scrollbar_width = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
3596 gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH; | |
136 | 3597 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
7 | 3598 gui.fgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
136 | 3599 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
7 | 3600 gui.bgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); |
207 | 3601 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */ |
3602 gui.spcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1); | |
7 | 3603 |
3604 /* Initialise atoms */ | |
3605 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
1904 | 3606 html_atom = gdk_atom_intern("text/html", FALSE); |
7 | 3607 utf8_string_atom = gdk_atom_intern("UTF8_STRING", FALSE); |
3608 #endif | |
3609 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3610 compound_text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("COMPOUND_TEXT", FALSE); | |
3611 text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("TEXT", FALSE); | |
3612 #endif | |
3613 | |
3614 /* Set default foreground and background colors. */ | |
3615 gui.norm_pixel = gui.def_norm_pixel; | |
3616 gui.back_pixel = gui.def_back_pixel; | |
3617 | |
3618 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
3619 { | |
3620 GtkWidget *plug; | |
3621 | |
3622 /* Use GtkSocket from another app. */ | |
3623 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
3624 plug = gtk_plug_new_for_display(gdk_display_get_default(), | |
3625 gtk_socket_id); | |
3626 #else | |
3627 plug = gtk_plug_new(gtk_socket_id); | |
3628 #endif | |
3629 if (plug != NULL && GTK_PLUG(plug)->socket_window != NULL) | |
3630 { | |
3631 gui.mainwin = plug; | |
3632 } | |
3633 else | |
3634 { | |
3635 g_warning("Connection to GTK+ socket (ID %u) failed", | |
3636 (unsigned int)gtk_socket_id); | |
3637 /* Pretend we never wanted it if it failed (get own window) */ | |
3638 gtk_socket_id = 0; | |
3639 } | |
3640 } | |
3641 | |
3642 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
3643 { | |
3644 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3645 if (using_gnome) | |
3646 { | |
3647 gui.mainwin = gnome_app_new("Vim", NULL); | |
3648 # ifdef USE_XSMP | |
3649 /* Use the GNOME save-yourself functionality now. */ | |
3650 xsmp_close(); | |
3651 # endif | |
3652 } | |
3653 else | |
3654 #endif | |
3655 gui.mainwin = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL); | |
3656 } | |
3657 | |
3658 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.mainwin, "vim-main-window"); | |
3659 | |
3660 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3661 /* Create the PangoContext used for drawing all text. */ | |
3662 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(gui.mainwin); | |
3663 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR); | |
3664 #endif | |
3665 | |
3666 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3667 gtk_window_set_policy(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), TRUE, TRUE, TRUE); | |
3668 #endif | |
3669 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), 0); | |
3670 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK); | |
3671 | |
3672 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "delete_event", | |
3673 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&delete_event_cb), NULL); | |
3674 | |
3675 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "realize", | |
3676 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&mainwin_realize), NULL); | |
3677 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
3678 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "screen_changed", | |
3679 G_CALLBACK(&mainwin_screen_changed_cb), NULL); | |
3680 #endif | |
3681 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3682 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new(); | |
3683 gtk_window_add_accel_group(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.accel_group); | |
3684 #else | |
3685 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_get_default(); | |
3686 #endif | |
3687 | |
685 | 3688 /* A vertical box holds the menubar, toolbar and main text window. */ |
7 | 3689 vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
3690 | |
3691 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3692 if (using_gnome) | |
3693 { | |
3694 # if defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
3695 /* automagically restore menubar/toolbar placement */ | |
3696 gnome_app_enable_layout_config(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), TRUE); | |
3697 # endif | |
3698 gnome_app_set_contents(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
3699 } | |
3700 else | |
3701 #endif | |
3702 { | |
3703 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), vbox); | |
3704 gtk_widget_show(vbox); | |
3705 } | |
3706 | |
3707 #ifdef FEAT_MENU | |
3708 /* | |
3709 * Create the menubar and handle | |
3710 */ | |
3711 gui.menubar = gtk_menu_bar_new(); | |
3712 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.menubar, "vim-menubar"); | |
3713 | |
36 | 3714 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
3715 /* Avoid that GTK takes <F10> away from us. */ | |
3716 { | |
3717 GtkSettings *gtk_settings; | |
3718 | |
3719 gtk_settings = gtk_settings_get_for_screen(gdk_screen_get_default()); | |
3720 g_object_set(gtk_settings, "gtk-menu-bar-accel", NULL, NULL); | |
3721 } | |
3722 # endif | |
3723 | |
3724 | |
7 | 3725 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME |
3726 if (using_gnome) | |
3727 { | |
3728 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3729 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
3730 | |
3731 gnome_app_set_menus(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_MENU_BAR(gui.menubar)); | |
3732 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
3733 GNOME_APP_MENUBAR_NAME); | |
798 | 3734 /* We don't want the menu to float. */ |
3735 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, | |
3736 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) | |
3737 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
7 | 3738 gui.menubar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); |
3739 # else | |
3740 gui.menubar_h = gnome_dock_item_new("VimMainMenu", | |
3741 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE | | |
3742 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL); | |
3743 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.menubar_h), gui.menubar); | |
3744 | |
3745 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock), | |
3746 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(gui.menubar_h), | |
3747 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */ | |
3748 1, /* band_num */ | |
3749 0, /* band_position */ | |
3750 0, /* offset */ | |
3751 TRUE); | |
3752 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar); | |
3753 # endif | |
3754 } | |
3755 else | |
3756 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
3757 { | |
827 | 3758 /* Always show the menubar, otherwise <F10> doesn't work. It may be |
3759 * disabled in gui_init() later. */ | |
3760 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar); | |
7 | 3761 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.menubar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); |
3762 } | |
3763 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
3764 | |
3765 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
3766 /* | |
3767 * Create the toolbar and handle | |
3768 */ | |
3769 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3770 /* some aesthetics on the toolbar */ | |
3771 gtk_rc_parse_string( | |
3772 "style \"vim-toolbar-style\" {\n" | |
3773 " GtkToolbar::button_relief = GTK_RELIEF_NONE\n" | |
3774 "}\n" | |
3775 "widget \"*.vim-toolbar\" style \"vim-toolbar-style\"\n"); | |
3776 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(); | |
3777 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.toolbar, "vim-toolbar"); | |
3778 # else | |
3779 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL, | |
3780 GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS); | |
3781 gtk_toolbar_set_button_relief(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar), GTK_RELIEF_NONE); | |
3782 # endif | |
3783 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
3784 | |
3785 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
3786 if (using_gnome) | |
3787 { | |
3788 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3789 BonoboDockItem *dockitem; | |
3790 | |
3791 gnome_app_set_toolbar(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
3792 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), | |
3793 GNOME_APP_TOOLBAR_NAME); | |
3794 gui.toolbar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem); | |
795 | 3795 /* When the toolbar is floating it gets stuck. So long as that isn't |
798 | 3796 * fixed let's disallow floating. */ |
795 | 3797 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem, |
798 | 3798 bonobo_dock_item_get_behavior(dockitem) |
3799 | BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING); | |
7 | 3800 gtk_container_set_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 0); |
3801 # else | |
3802 GtkWidget *dockitem; | |
3803 | |
3804 dockitem = gnome_dock_item_new("VimToolBar", | |
3805 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE); | |
3806 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(dockitem), GTK_WIDGET(gui.toolbar)); | |
3807 gui.toolbar_h = dockitem; | |
3808 | |
3809 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock), | |
3810 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(dockitem), | |
3811 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */ | |
3812 1, /* band_num */ | |
3813 1, /* band_position */ | |
3814 0, /* offset */ | |
3815 TRUE); | |
3816 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 2); | |
3817 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar); | |
3818 # endif | |
3819 } | |
3820 else | |
3821 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */ | |
3822 { | |
3823 # ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3824 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 1); | |
3825 # endif | |
3826 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL | |
3827 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
3828 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar); | |
3829 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.toolbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
3830 } | |
3831 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
3832 | |
685 | 3833 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
782 | 3834 /* |
3835 * Use a Notebook for the tab pages labels. The labels are hidden by | |
3836 * default. | |
3837 */ | |
791 | 3838 gui.tabline = gtk_notebook_new(); |
3839 gtk_widget_show(gui.tabline); | |
3840 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.tabline, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
3841 gtk_notebook_set_show_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
3842 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); | |
841 | 3843 gtk_notebook_set_scrollable(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), TRUE); |
868 | 3844 gtk_notebook_set_tab_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE); |
791 | 3845 |
846 | 3846 tabline_tooltip = gtk_tooltips_new(); |
3847 gtk_tooltips_enable(GTK_TOOLTIPS(tabline_tooltip)); | |
3848 | |
3849 { | |
3850 GtkWidget *page, *label, *event_box; | |
791 | 3851 |
856 | 3852 /* Add the first tab. */ |
846 | 3853 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0); |
3854 gtk_widget_show(page); | |
3855 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.tabline), page); | |
3856 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-"); | |
3857 gtk_widget_show(label); | |
3858 event_box = gtk_event_box_new(); | |
3859 gtk_widget_show(event_box); | |
1660 | 3860 gtk_object_set_user_data(GTK_OBJECT(event_box), (gpointer)1L); |
851 | 3861 gtk_misc_set_padding(GTK_MISC(label), 2, 2); |
846 | 3862 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(event_box), label); |
3863 gtk_notebook_set_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page, event_box); | |
791 | 3864 } |
865 | 3865 |
791 | 3866 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "switch_page", |
856 | 3867 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_select_tab), NULL); |
791 | 3868 |
3869 /* Create a popup menu for the tab line and connect it. */ | |
3870 tabline_menu = create_tabline_menu(); | |
3871 gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "button_press_event", | |
856 | 3872 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_tabline_menu), GTK_OBJECT(tabline_menu)); |
685 | 3873 #endif |
3874 | |
7 | 3875 gui.formwin = gtk_form_new(); |
3876 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.formwin), 0); | |
3877 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.formwin, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK); | |
3878 | |
3879 gui.drawarea = gtk_drawing_area_new(); | |
3880 | |
3881 /* Determine which events we will filter. */ | |
3882 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.drawarea, | |
3883 GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK | | |
3884 GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
3885 GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK | | |
3886 GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK | | |
3887 GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK | | |
3888 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3889 GDK_SCROLL_MASK | | |
3890 #endif | |
3891 GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK | | |
3892 GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK | | |
3893 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK | | |
3894 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK); | |
3895 | |
3896 gtk_widget_show(gui.drawarea); | |
3897 gtk_form_put(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), gui.drawarea, 0, 0); | |
3898 gtk_widget_show(gui.formwin); | |
3899 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.formwin, TRUE, TRUE, 0); | |
3900 | |
3901 /* For GtkSockets, key-presses must go to the focus widget (drawarea) | |
3902 * and not the window. */ | |
3903 gtk_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
3904 : GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
3905 "key_press_event", | |
3906 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(key_press_event), NULL); | |
3907 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) | |
3908 /* Also forward key release events for the benefit of GTK+ 2 input | |
3909 * modules. Try CTRL-SHIFT-xdigits to enter a Unicode code point. */ | |
3910 g_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin) | |
3911 : G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), | |
3912 "key_release_event", | |
3913 G_CALLBACK(&key_release_event), NULL); | |
3914 #endif | |
3915 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "realize", | |
3916 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_realize_cb), NULL); | |
3917 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "unrealize", | |
3918 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_unrealize_cb), NULL); | |
3919 | |
3920 gtk_signal_connect_after(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "style_set", | |
3921 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&drawarea_style_set_cb), NULL); | |
3922 | |
3923 gui.visibility = GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED; | |
3924 | |
3925 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) | |
3926 wm_protocols_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_PROTOCOLS", FALSE); | |
3927 save_yourself_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_SAVE_YOURSELF", FALSE); | |
3928 #endif | |
3929 | |
3930 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
1884 | 3931 /* make sure keyboard input can go to the drawarea */ |
7 | 3932 GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS(gui.drawarea, GTK_CAN_FOCUS); |
3933 | |
3934 /* | |
3935 * Set clipboard specific atoms | |
3936 */ | |
3937 vim_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIM_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
3938 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
3939 vimenc_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, FALSE); | |
3940 #endif | |
3941 clip_star.gtk_sel_atom = GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY; | |
3942 clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom = gdk_atom_intern("CLIPBOARD", FALSE); | |
3943 | |
3944 /* | |
3945 * Start out by adding the configured border width into the border offset. | |
3946 */ | |
3947 gui.border_offset = gui.border_width; | |
3948 | |
3949 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "visibility_notify_event", | |
3950 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(visibility_event), NULL); | |
3951 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "expose_event", | |
3952 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(expose_event), NULL); | |
3953 | |
3954 /* | |
3955 * Only install these enter/leave callbacks when 'p' in 'guioptions'. | |
3956 * Only needed for some window managers. | |
3957 */ | |
3958 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_POINTER) != NULL) | |
3959 { | |
3960 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "leave_notify_event", | |
3961 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(leave_notify_event), NULL); | |
3962 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "enter_notify_event", | |
3963 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_notify_event), NULL); | |
3964 } | |
3965 | |
791 | 3966 /* Real windows can get focus ... GtkPlug, being a mere container can't, |
3967 * only its widgets. Arguably, this could be common code and we not use | |
3968 * the window focus at all, but let's be safe. | |
3969 */ | |
3970 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
3971 { | |
856 | 3972 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_out_event", |
3973 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
3974 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_in_event", | |
3975 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
791 | 3976 } |
3977 else | |
3978 { | |
856 | 3979 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_out_event", |
3980 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
3981 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_in_event", | |
3982 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
791 | 3983 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE |
856 | 3984 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_out_event", |
3985 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL); | |
3986 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_in_event", | |
3987 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL); | |
791 | 3988 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */ |
3989 } | |
7 | 3990 |
3991 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "motion_notify_event", | |
3992 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(motion_notify_event), NULL); | |
3993 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_press_event", | |
3994 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_event), NULL); | |
3995 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_release_event", | |
3996 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_release_event), NULL); | |
3997 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
3998 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "scroll_event", | |
3999 G_CALLBACK(&scroll_event), NULL); | |
4000 #endif | |
4001 | |
4002 /* | |
4003 * Add selection handler functions. | |
4004 */ | |
4005 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_clear_event", | |
4006 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_clear_event), NULL); | |
4007 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_received", | |
4008 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_received_cb), NULL); | |
4009 | |
2248 | 4010 gui_gtk_set_selection_targets(); |
7 | 4011 |
4012 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_get", | |
4013 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_get_cb), NULL); | |
4014 | |
4015 /* Pretend we don't have input focus, we will get an event if we do. */ | |
4016 gui.in_focus = FALSE; | |
4017 | |
4018 return OK; | |
4019 } | |
4020 | |
4021 #if (defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) || defined(PROTO) | |
4022 /* | |
4023 * This is called from gui_start() after a fork() has been done. | |
4024 * We have to tell the session manager our new PID. | |
4025 */ | |
4026 void | |
4027 gui_mch_forked(void) | |
4028 { | |
4029 if (using_gnome) | |
4030 { | |
4031 GnomeClient *client; | |
4032 | |
4033 client = gnome_master_client(); | |
4034 | |
4035 if (client != NULL) | |
4036 gnome_client_set_process_id(client, getpid()); | |
4037 } | |
4038 } | |
4039 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION */ | |
4040 | |
4041 /* | |
4042 * Called when the foreground or background color has been changed. | |
4043 * This used to change the graphics contexts directly but we are | |
4044 * currently manipulating them where desired. | |
4045 */ | |
4046 void | |
4047 gui_mch_new_colors(void) | |
4048 { | |
4049 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
4050 { | |
4051 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 }; | |
4052 | |
4053 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
4054 gdk_window_set_background(gui.drawarea->window, &color); | |
4055 } | |
4056 } | |
4057 | |
4058 /* | |
4059 * This signal informs us about the need to rearrange our sub-widgets. | |
4060 */ | |
4061 static gint | |
1884 | 4062 form_configure_event(GtkWidget *widget UNUSED, |
4063 GdkEventConfigure *event, | |
4064 gpointer data UNUSED) | |
7 | 4065 { |
791 | 4066 int usable_height = event->height; |
4067 | |
4068 /* When in a GtkPlug, we can't guarantee valid heights (as a round | |
4069 * no. of char-heights), so we have to manually sanitise them. | |
4070 * Widths seem to sort themselves out, don't ask me why. | |
4071 */ | |
4072 if (gtk_socket_id != 0) | |
856 | 4073 usable_height -= (gui.char_height - (gui.char_height/2)); /* sic. */ |
791 | 4074 |
7 | 4075 gtk_form_freeze(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
791 | 4076 gui_resize_shell(event->width, usable_height); |
7 | 4077 gtk_form_thaw(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)); |
4078 | |
4079 return TRUE; | |
4080 } | |
4081 | |
4082 /* | |
4083 * Function called when window already closed. | |
4084 * We can't do much more here than to trying to preserve what had been done, | |
4085 * since the window is already inevitably going away. | |
4086 */ | |
4087 static void | |
1884 | 4088 mainwin_destroy_cb(GtkObject *object UNUSED, gpointer data UNUSED) |
7 | 4089 { |
4090 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */ | |
4091 full_screen = FALSE; | |
4092 | |
4093 gui.mainwin = NULL; | |
4094 gui.drawarea = NULL; | |
4095 | |
4096 if (!exiting) /* only do anything if the destroy was unexpected */ | |
4097 { | |
419 | 4098 vim_strncpy(IObuff, |
4099 (char_u *)_("Vim: Main window unexpectedly destroyed\n"), | |
4100 IOSIZE - 1); | |
7 | 4101 preserve_exit(); |
4102 } | |
4103 } | |
4104 | |
791 | 4105 |
4106 /* | |
4107 * Bit of a hack to ensure we start GtkPlug windows with the correct window | |
4108 * hints (and thus the required size from -geom), but that after that we | |
4109 * put the hints back to normal (the actual minimum size) so we may | |
4110 * subsequently be resized smaller. GtkSocket (the parent end) uses the | |
1226 | 4111 * plug's window 'min hints to set *it's* minimum size, but that's also the |
791 | 4112 * only way we have of making ourselves bigger (by set lines/columns). |
4113 * Thus set hints at start-up to ensure correct init. size, then a | |
4114 * second after the final attempt to reset the real minimum hinst (done by | |
1226 | 4115 * scrollbar init.), actually do the standard hinst and stop the timer. |
791 | 4116 * We'll not let the default hints be set while this timer's active. |
4117 */ | |
4118 static gboolean | |
1884 | 4119 check_startup_plug_hints(gpointer data UNUSED) |
791 | 4120 { |
4121 if (init_window_hints_state == 1) | |
4122 { | |
856 | 4123 /* Safe to use normal hints now */ |
4124 init_window_hints_state = 0; | |
4125 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
4126 return FALSE; /* stop timer */ | |
791 | 4127 } |
4128 | |
4129 /* Keep on trying */ | |
4130 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
4131 return TRUE; | |
4132 } | |
4133 | |
7 | 4134 /* |
4135 * Open the GUI window which was created by a call to gui_mch_init(). | |
4136 */ | |
4137 int | |
4138 gui_mch_open(void) | |
4139 { | |
4140 guicolor_T fg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
4141 guicolor_T bg_pixel = INVALCOLOR; | |
1966 | 4142 guint pixel_width; |
4143 guint pixel_height; | |
7 | 4144 |
4145 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4146 /* | |
4147 * Allow setting a window role on the command line, or invent one | |
4148 * if none was specified. This is mainly useful for GNOME session | |
4149 * support; allowing the WM to restore window placement. | |
4150 */ | |
4151 if (role_argument != NULL) | |
4152 { | |
4153 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role_argument); | |
4154 } | |
4155 else | |
4156 { | |
4157 char *role; | |
4158 | |
4159 /* Invent a unique-enough ID string for the role */ | |
4160 role = g_strdup_printf("vim-%u-%u-%u", | |
4161 (unsigned)mch_get_pid(), | |
4162 (unsigned)g_random_int(), | |
4163 (unsigned)time(NULL)); | |
4164 | |
4165 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role); | |
4166 g_free(role); | |
4167 } | |
4168 #endif | |
4169 | |
4170 if (gui_win_x != -1 && gui_win_y != -1) | |
4171 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4172 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui_win_x, gui_win_y); | |
4173 #else | |
4174 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, gui_win_x, gui_win_y); | |
4175 #endif | |
4176 | |
4177 /* Determine user specified geometry, if present. */ | |
4178 if (gui.geom != NULL) | |
4179 { | |
4180 int mask; | |
4181 unsigned int w, h; | |
4182 int x = 0; | |
4183 int y = 0; | |
4184 | |
4185 mask = XParseGeometry((char *)gui.geom, &x, &y, &w, &h); | |
4186 | |
4187 if (mask & WidthValue) | |
4188 Columns = w; | |
4189 if (mask & HeightValue) | |
857 | 4190 { |
1884 | 4191 if (p_window > (long)h - 1 || !option_was_set((char_u *)"window")) |
857 | 4192 p_window = h - 1; |
7 | 4193 Rows = h; |
857 | 4194 } |
1426 | 4195 |
4196 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); | |
4197 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
4198 | |
4199 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4200 pixel_width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4201 pixel_height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4202 #endif | |
4203 | |
7 | 4204 if (mask & (XValue | YValue)) |
1426 | 4205 { |
1757 | 4206 int ww, hh; |
4207 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(&ww, &hh); | |
4208 hh += p_ghr + get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4209 ww += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
1426 | 4210 if (mask & XNegative) |
1757 | 4211 x += ww - pixel_width; |
1426 | 4212 if (mask & YNegative) |
1757 | 4213 y += hh - pixel_height; |
7 | 4214 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
4215 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
4216 #else | |
4217 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, x, y); | |
4218 #endif | |
1426 | 4219 } |
7 | 4220 vim_free(gui.geom); |
4221 gui.geom = NULL; | |
791 | 4222 |
856 | 4223 /* From now until everyone's stopped trying to set the window hints |
4224 * to their correct minimum values, stop them being set as we need | |
4225 * them to remain at our required size for the parent GtkSocket to | |
4226 * give us the right initial size. | |
4227 */ | |
791 | 4228 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && (mask & WidthValue || mask & HeightValue)) |
856 | 4229 { |
4230 update_window_manager_hints(pixel_width, pixel_height); | |
4231 init_window_hints_state = 1; | |
4232 g_timeout_add(1000, check_startup_plug_hints, NULL); | |
4233 } | |
7 | 4234 } |
4235 | |
1966 | 4236 pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width); |
4237 pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height); | |
4238 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4239 /* For GTK2 changing the size of the form widget doesn't cause window | |
4240 * resizing. */ | |
2254
4620acaf4814
One more fix for conceal patch.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2248
diff
changeset
|
4241 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) |
1966 | 4242 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), pixel_width, pixel_height); |
4243 #else | |
4244 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), pixel_width, pixel_height); | |
4245 #endif | |
791 | 4246 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 4247 |
4248 if (foreground_argument != NULL) | |
4249 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)foreground_argument); | |
4250 if (fg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
4251 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"Black"); | |
4252 | |
4253 if (background_argument != NULL) | |
4254 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)background_argument); | |
4255 if (bg_pixel == INVALCOLOR) | |
4256 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"White"); | |
4257 | |
4258 if (found_reverse_arg) | |
4259 { | |
4260 gui.def_norm_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
4261 gui.def_back_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
4262 } | |
4263 else | |
4264 { | |
4265 gui.def_norm_pixel = fg_pixel; | |
4266 gui.def_back_pixel = bg_pixel; | |
4267 } | |
4268 | |
4269 /* Get the colors from the "Normal" and "Menu" group (set in syntax.c or | |
4270 * in a vimrc file) */ | |
4271 set_normal_colors(); | |
4272 | |
4273 /* Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color */ | |
4274 gui_check_colors(); | |
4275 | |
4276 /* Get the colors for the highlight groups (gui_check_colors() might have | |
4277 * changed them). */ | |
4278 highlight_gui_started(); /* re-init colors and fonts */ | |
4279 | |
4280 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "destroy", | |
4281 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(mainwin_destroy_cb), NULL); | |
4282 | |
4283 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN | |
4284 hangul_keyboard_set(); | |
4285 #endif | |
4286 | |
4287 /* | |
4288 * Notify the fixed area about the need to resize the contents of the | |
4289 * gui.formwin, which we use for random positioning of the included | |
4290 * components. | |
4291 * | |
4292 * We connect this signal deferred finally after anything is in place, | |
4293 * since this is intended to handle resizements coming from the window | |
4294 * manager upon us and should not interfere with what VIM is requesting | |
4295 * upon startup. | |
4296 */ | |
4297 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.formwin), "configure_event", | |
4298 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(form_configure_event), NULL); | |
4299 | |
4300 #ifdef FEAT_DND | |
2248 | 4301 /* Set up for receiving DND items. */ |
4302 gui_gtk_set_dnd_targets(); | |
7 | 4303 |
4304 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "drag_data_received", | |
4305 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drag_data_received_cb), NULL); | |
4306 #endif | |
4307 | |
4308 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4309 /* With GTK+ 2, we need to iconify the window before calling show() | |
4310 * to avoid mapping the window for a short time. This is just as one | |
4311 * would expect it to work, but it's different in GTK+ 1. The funny | |
4312 * thing is that iconifying after show() _does_ work with GTK+ 1. | |
4313 * (BTW doing this in the "realize" handler makes no difference.) */ | |
4314 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
4315 gui_mch_iconify(); | |
4316 #endif | |
4317 | |
4318 { | |
4319 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
4320 unsigned long menu_handler = 0; | |
4321 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
4322 unsigned long tool_handler = 0; | |
4323 # endif | |
4324 /* | |
4325 * Urgh hackish :/ For some reason BonoboDockLayout always forces a | |
4326 * show when restoring the saved layout configuration. We can't just | |
4327 * hide the widgets again after gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin) since it's | |
4328 * a toplevel window and thus will be realized immediately. Instead, | |
4329 * connect signal handlers to hide the widgets just after they've been | |
4330 * marked visible, but before the main window is realized. | |
4331 */ | |
4332 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL) | |
4333 menu_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.menubar_h, "show", | |
4334 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
4335 NULL); | |
4336 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
4337 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) == NULL | |
4338 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))) | |
4339 tool_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.toolbar_h, "show", | |
4340 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide), | |
4341 NULL); | |
4342 # endif | |
4343 #endif | |
4344 gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin); | |
4345 | |
4346 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU) | |
4347 if (menu_handler != 0) | |
4348 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.menubar_h, menu_handler); | |
4349 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR | |
4350 if (tool_handler != 0) | |
4351 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.toolbar_h, tool_handler); | |
4352 # endif | |
4353 #endif | |
4354 } | |
4355 | |
4356 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4357 /* With GTK+ 1, we need to iconify the window after calling show(). | |
4358 * See the comment above for details. */ | |
4359 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
4360 gui_mch_iconify(); | |
4361 #endif | |
4362 | |
4363 return OK; | |
4364 } | |
4365 | |
4366 | |
4367 void | |
1884 | 4368 gui_mch_exit(int rc UNUSED) |
7 | 4369 { |
4370 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
4371 gtk_widget_destroy(gui.mainwin); | |
4372 | |
4373 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4374 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4375 } | |
4376 | |
4377 /* | |
4378 * Get the position of the top left corner of the window. | |
4379 */ | |
4380 int | |
4381 gui_mch_get_winpos(int *x, int *y) | |
4382 { | |
4383 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4384 gtk_window_get_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
4385 #else | |
4386 /* For some people this must be gdk_window_get_origin() for a correct | |
4387 * result. Where is the documentation! */ | |
4388 gdk_window_get_root_origin(gui.mainwin->window, x, y); | |
4389 #endif | |
4390 return OK; | |
4391 } | |
4392 | |
4393 /* | |
4394 * Set the position of the top left corner of the window to the given | |
4395 * coordinates. | |
4396 */ | |
4397 void | |
4398 gui_mch_set_winpos(int x, int y) | |
4399 { | |
4400 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4401 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y); | |
4402 #else | |
4403 gdk_window_move(gui.mainwin->window, x, y); | |
4404 #endif | |
4405 } | |
4406 | |
4407 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4408 #if 0 | |
4409 static int resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
4410 /* | |
4411 * Idle handler to force resize. Used by gui_mch_set_shellsize() to ensure | |
4412 * the shell size doesn't exceed the window size, i.e. if the window manager | |
4413 * ignored our size request. Usually this happens if the window is maximized. | |
4414 * | |
4415 * FIXME: It'd be nice if we could find a little more orthodox solution. | |
4416 * See also the remark below in gui_mch_set_shellsize(). | |
4417 * | |
4418 * DISABLED: When doing ":set lines+=1" this function would first invoke | |
4419 * gui_resize_shell() with the old size, then the normal callback would | |
4420 * report the new size through form_configure_event(). That caused the window | |
4421 * layout to be messed up. | |
4422 */ | |
4423 static gboolean | |
4424 force_shell_resize_idle(gpointer data) | |
4425 { | |
4426 if (gui.mainwin != NULL | |
4427 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin) | |
4428 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(gui.mainwin)) | |
4429 { | |
4430 int width; | |
4431 int height; | |
4432 | |
4433 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &width, &height); | |
4434 | |
4435 width -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4436 height -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4437 | |
4438 gui_resize_shell(width, height); | |
4439 } | |
4440 | |
4441 resize_idle_installed = FALSE; | |
4442 return FALSE; /* don't call me again */ | |
4443 } | |
4444 #endif | |
4445 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4446 | |
1967 | 4447 #if defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) |
4448 /* | |
4449 * Return TRUE if the main window is maximized. | |
4450 */ | |
4451 int | |
4452 gui_mch_maximized() | |
4453 { | |
4454 return (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL | |
4455 && (gdk_window_get_state(gui.mainwin->window) | |
4456 & GDK_WINDOW_STATE_MAXIMIZED)); | |
4457 } | |
4458 | |
4459 /* | |
4460 * Unmaximize the main window | |
4461 */ | |
4462 void | |
4463 gui_mch_unmaximize() | |
4464 { | |
4465 if (gui.mainwin != NULL) | |
4466 gtk_window_unmaximize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
4467 } | |
4468 #endif | |
4469 | |
7 | 4470 /* |
4471 * Set the windows size. | |
4472 */ | |
4473 void | |
4474 gui_mch_set_shellsize(int width, int height, | |
1884 | 4475 int min_width UNUSED, int min_height UNUSED, |
4476 int base_width UNUSED, int base_height UNUSED, | |
4477 int direction UNUSED) | |
7 | 4478 { |
4479 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4480 /* Hack: When the form already is at the desired size, the window might | |
4481 * have been resized with the mouse. Force a resize by setting a | |
4482 * different size first. */ | |
4483 if (GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->width == width | |
4484 && GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->height == height) | |
4485 { | |
4486 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width + 1, height + 1); | |
4487 gui_mch_update(); | |
4488 } | |
4489 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width, height); | |
4490 #endif | |
4491 | |
4492 /* give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place */ | |
4493 gui_mch_update(); | |
4494 | |
791 | 4495 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 |
7 | 4496 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */ |
791 | 4497 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
4498 | |
2154
7c8c7c95a865
First step in the Vim 7.3 branch. Changed version numbers.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2074
diff
changeset
|
4499 #else |
791 | 4500 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */ |
4501 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) | |
856 | 4502 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
791 | 4503 |
7 | 4504 /* With GTK+ 2, changing the size of the form widget doesn't resize |
791 | 4505 * the window. So let's do it the other way around and resize the |
7 | 4506 * main window instead. */ |
4507 width += get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4508 height += get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4509 | |
791 | 4510 if (gtk_socket_id == 0) |
856 | 4511 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), width, height); |
791 | 4512 else |
856 | 4513 update_window_manager_hints(width, height); |
7 | 4514 |
2154
7c8c7c95a865
First step in the Vim 7.3 branch. Changed version numbers.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2074
diff
changeset
|
4515 # if 0 |
7 | 4516 if (!resize_idle_installed) |
4517 { | |
4518 g_idle_add_full(GDK_PRIORITY_EVENTS + 10, | |
4519 &force_shell_resize_idle, NULL, NULL); | |
4520 resize_idle_installed = TRUE; | |
4521 } | |
2154
7c8c7c95a865
First step in the Vim 7.3 branch. Changed version numbers.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2074
diff
changeset
|
4522 # endif |
7 | 4523 /* |
4524 * Wait until all events are processed to prevent a crash because the | |
4525 * real size of the drawing area doesn't reflect Vim's internal ideas. | |
4526 * | |
4527 * This is a bit of a hack, since Vim is a terminal application with a GUI | |
4528 * on top, while the GUI expects to be the boss. | |
4529 */ | |
4530 gui_mch_update(); | |
4531 #endif | |
4532 } | |
4533 | |
4534 | |
4535 /* | |
4536 * The screen size is used to make sure the initial window doesn't get bigger | |
4537 * than the screen. This subtracts some room for menubar, toolbar and window | |
4538 * decorations. | |
4539 */ | |
4540 void | |
4541 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(int *screen_w, int *screen_h) | |
4542 { | |
4543 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
4544 GdkScreen* screen; | |
4545 | |
4546 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gtk_widget_has_screen(gui.mainwin)) | |
4547 screen = gtk_widget_get_screen(gui.mainwin); | |
4548 else | |
4549 screen = gdk_screen_get_default(); | |
4550 | |
4551 *screen_w = gdk_screen_get_width(screen); | |
4552 *screen_h = gdk_screen_get_height(screen) - p_ghr; | |
4553 #else | |
4554 *screen_w = gdk_screen_width(); | |
4555 /* Subtract 'guiheadroom' from the height to allow some room for the | |
4556 * window manager (task list and window title bar). */ | |
4557 *screen_h = gdk_screen_height() - p_ghr; | |
4558 #endif | |
4559 | |
4560 /* | |
4561 * FIXME: dirty trick: Because the gui_get_base_height() doesn't include | |
4562 * the toolbar and menubar for GTK, we subtract them from the screen | |
4563 * hight, so that the window size can be made to fit on the screen. | |
4564 * This should be completely changed later. | |
4565 */ | |
4566 *screen_w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
4567 *screen_h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
4568 } | |
4569 | |
4570 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(PROTO) | |
4571 void | |
1884 | 4572 gui_mch_settitle(char_u *title, char_u *icon UNUSED) |
7 | 4573 { |
4574 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4575 if (title != NULL && output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
4576 title = string_convert(&output_conv, title, NULL); | |
4577 # endif | |
4578 | |
4579 gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), (const char *)title); | |
4580 | |
4581 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4582 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
4583 vim_free(title); | |
4584 # endif | |
4585 } | |
4586 #endif /* FEAT_TITLE */ | |
4587 | |
4588 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
4589 void | |
4590 gui_mch_enable_menu(int showit) | |
4591 { | |
4592 GtkWidget *widget; | |
4593 | |
4594 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
4595 if (using_gnome) | |
4596 widget = gui.menubar_h; | |
4597 else | |
4598 # endif | |
4599 widget = gui.menubar; | |
4600 | |
827 | 4601 /* Do not disable the menu while starting up, otherwise F10 doesn't work. */ |
4602 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget) && !gui.starting) | |
7 | 4603 { |
4604 if (showit) | |
4605 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
4606 else | |
4607 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
4608 | |
791 | 4609 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 4610 } |
4611 } | |
4612 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
4613 | |
4614 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(PROTO) | |
4615 void | |
4616 gui_mch_show_toolbar(int showit) | |
4617 { | |
4618 GtkWidget *widget; | |
4619 | |
4620 if (gui.toolbar == NULL) | |
4621 return; | |
4622 | |
4623 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME | |
4624 if (using_gnome) | |
4625 widget = gui.toolbar_h; | |
4626 else | |
4627 # endif | |
4628 widget = gui.toolbar; | |
4629 | |
4630 if (showit) | |
4631 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar)); | |
4632 | |
4633 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget)) | |
4634 { | |
4635 if (showit) | |
4636 gtk_widget_show(widget); | |
4637 else | |
4638 gtk_widget_hide(widget); | |
4639 | |
791 | 4640 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 4641 } |
4642 } | |
4643 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */ | |
4644 | |
4645 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4646 /* | |
4647 * Get a font structure for highlighting. | |
4648 * "cbdata" is a pointer to the global gui structure. | |
4649 */ | |
4650 static void | |
4651 font_sel_ok(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata) | |
4652 { | |
4653 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata; | |
4654 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fs = (GtkFontSelectionDialog *)vw->fontdlg; | |
4655 | |
4656 if (vw->fontname) | |
4657 g_free(vw->fontname); | |
4658 | |
4659 vw->fontname = (char_u *)gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(fs); | |
4660 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg); | |
4661 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4662 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4663 } | |
4664 | |
4665 static void | |
4666 font_sel_cancel(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata) | |
4667 { | |
4668 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata; | |
4669 | |
4670 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg); | |
4671 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4672 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4673 } | |
4674 | |
4675 static void | |
4676 font_sel_destroy(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata) | |
4677 { | |
4678 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata; | |
4679 | |
4680 vw->fontdlg = NULL; | |
4681 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
4682 gtk_main_quit(); | |
4683 } | |
4684 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4685 | |
4686 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4687 /* | |
4688 * Check if a given font is a CJK font. This is done in a very crude manner. It | |
4689 * just see if U+04E00 for zh and ja and U+AC00 for ko are covered in a given | |
4690 * font. Consequently, this function cannot be used as a general purpose check | |
4691 * for CJK-ness for which fontconfig APIs should be used. This is only used by | |
4692 * gui_mch_init_font() to deal with 'CJK fixed width fonts'. | |
4693 */ | |
4694 static int | |
4695 is_cjk_font(PangoFontDescription *font_desc) | |
4696 { | |
4697 static const char * const cjk_langs[] = | |
4698 {"zh_CN", "zh_TW", "zh_HK", "ja", "ko"}; | |
4699 | |
4700 PangoFont *font; | |
4701 unsigned i; | |
4702 int is_cjk = FALSE; | |
4703 | |
4704 font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
4705 | |
4706 if (font == NULL) | |
4707 return FALSE; | |
4708 | |
4709 for (i = 0; !is_cjk && i < G_N_ELEMENTS(cjk_langs); ++i) | |
4710 { | |
4711 PangoCoverage *coverage; | |
4712 gunichar uc; | |
4713 | |
4714 coverage = pango_font_get_coverage( | |
4715 font, pango_language_from_string(cjk_langs[i])); | |
4716 | |
4717 if (coverage != NULL) | |
4718 { | |
4719 uc = (cjk_langs[i][0] == 'k') ? 0xAC00 : 0x4E00; | |
4720 is_cjk = (pango_coverage_get(coverage, uc) == PANGO_COVERAGE_EXACT); | |
4721 pango_coverage_unref(coverage); | |
4722 } | |
4723 } | |
4724 | |
4725 g_object_unref(font); | |
4726 | |
4727 return is_cjk; | |
4728 } | |
4729 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4730 | |
445 | 4731 /* |
4732 * Adjust gui.char_height (after 'linespace' was changed). | |
4733 */ | |
7 | 4734 int |
445 | 4735 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(void) |
7 | 4736 { |
4737 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4738 PangoFontMetrics *metrics; | |
4739 int ascent; | |
4740 int descent; | |
4741 | |
4742 metrics = pango_context_get_metrics(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font, | |
4743 pango_context_get_language(gui.text_context)); | |
4744 ascent = pango_font_metrics_get_ascent(metrics); | |
4745 descent = pango_font_metrics_get_descent(metrics); | |
4746 | |
4747 pango_font_metrics_unref(metrics); | |
4748 | |
4749 gui.char_height = (ascent + descent + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE | |
445 | 4750 + p_linespace; |
136 | 4751 /* LINTED: avoid warning: bitwise operation on signed value */ |
7 | 4752 gui.char_ascent = PANGO_PIXELS(ascent + p_linespace * PANGO_SCALE / 2); |
4753 | |
4754 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4755 | |
4756 gui.char_height = gui.current_font->ascent + gui.current_font->descent | |
445 | 4757 + p_linespace; |
7 | 4758 gui.char_ascent = gui.current_font->ascent + p_linespace / 2; |
4759 | |
4760 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4761 | |
4762 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens | |
4763 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */ | |
4764 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0); | |
4765 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1); | |
4766 | |
4767 return OK; | |
4768 } | |
4769 | |
4770 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO) | |
4771 /* | |
4772 * Try to load the requested fontset. | |
4773 */ | |
4774 GuiFontset | |
4775 gui_mch_get_fontset(char_u *name, int report_error, int fixed_width) | |
4776 { | |
4777 GdkFont *font; | |
4778 | |
4779 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL) | |
4780 return NOFONT; | |
4781 | |
4782 font = gdk_fontset_load((gchar *)name); | |
4783 | |
4784 if (font == NULL) | |
4785 { | |
4786 if (report_error) | |
4787 EMSG2(_(e_fontset), name); | |
4788 return NOFONT; | |
4789 } | |
4790 /* TODO: check if the font is fixed width. */ | |
4791 | |
4792 /* reference this font as being in use */ | |
4793 gdk_font_ref(font); | |
4794 | |
4795 return (GuiFontset)font; | |
4796 } | |
4797 #endif /* FEAT_XFONTSET */ | |
4798 | |
4799 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4800 /* | |
4801 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory. | |
4802 * "oldval" is the previous value. | |
4803 * Return NULL when cancelled. | |
4804 */ | |
4805 char_u * | |
4806 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval) | |
4807 { | |
4808 char_u *fontname = NULL; | |
4809 | |
4810 if (!gui.fontdlg) | |
4811 { | |
4812 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd = NULL; | |
4813 | |
4814 gui.fontdlg = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(_("Font Selection")); | |
4815 fsd = GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg); | |
4816 gtk_window_set_modal(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), TRUE); | |
4817 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), | |
4818 GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
4819 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.fontdlg), "destroy", | |
4820 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_destroy), &gui); | |
4821 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->ok_button), "clicked", | |
4822 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_ok), &gui); | |
4823 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->cancel_button), "clicked", | |
4824 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_cancel), &gui); | |
4825 } | |
4826 | |
4827 if (oldval != NULL && *oldval != NUL) | |
4828 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4829 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), (char *)oldval); | |
1959 | 4830 else |
4831 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4832 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), DEFAULT_FONT); | |
7 | 4833 |
4834 if (gui.fontname) | |
4835 { | |
4836 g_free(gui.fontname); | |
4837 gui.fontname = NULL; | |
4838 } | |
4839 gtk_window_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE); | |
4840 gtk_widget_show(gui.fontdlg); | |
4841 { | |
4842 static gchar *spacings[] = {"c", "m", NULL}; | |
4843 | |
4844 /* In GTK 1.2.3 this must be after the gtk_widget_show() call, | |
4845 * otherwise everything is blocked for ten seconds. */ | |
4846 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_filter( | |
4847 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), | |
4848 GTK_FONT_FILTER_BASE, | |
4849 GTK_FONT_ALL, NULL, NULL, | |
4850 NULL, NULL, spacings, NULL); | |
4851 } | |
4852 | |
4853 /* Wait for the font dialog to be closed. */ | |
4854 while (gui.fontdlg && GTK_WIDGET_DRAWABLE(gui.fontdlg)) | |
4855 gtk_main_iteration_do(TRUE); | |
4856 | |
4857 if (gui.fontname != NULL) | |
4858 { | |
714 | 4859 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape that, |
4860 * because in 'guifont' it separates names. */ | |
4861 fontname = vim_strsave_escaped(gui.fontname, (char_u *)","); | |
7 | 4862 g_free(gui.fontname); |
4863 gui.fontname = NULL; | |
4864 } | |
4865 return fontname; | |
4866 } | |
4867 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
4868 | |
4869 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
4870 /* | |
4871 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory. | |
4872 * "oldval" is the previous value. Return NULL when cancelled. | |
4873 * This should probably go into gui_gtk.c. Hmm. | |
4874 * FIXME: | |
4875 * The GTK2 font selection dialog has no filtering API. So we could either | |
4876 * a) implement our own (possibly copying the code from somewhere else) or | |
4877 * b) just live with it. | |
4878 */ | |
4879 char_u * | |
4880 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval) | |
4881 { | |
4882 GtkWidget *dialog; | |
4883 int response; | |
4884 char_u *fontname = NULL; | |
4885 char_u *oldname; | |
4886 | |
4887 dialog = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(NULL); | |
4888 | |
4889 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
4890 gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), TRUE); | |
4891 | |
4892 if (oldval != NULL && oldval[0] != NUL) | |
4893 { | |
4894 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
4895 oldname = string_convert(&output_conv, oldval, NULL); | |
4896 else | |
4897 oldname = oldval; | |
4898 | |
4899 /* Annoying bug in GTK (or Pango): if the font name does not include a | |
4900 * size, zero is used. Use default point size ten. */ | |
4901 if (!vim_isdigit(oldname[STRLEN(oldname) - 1])) | |
4902 { | |
4903 char_u *p = vim_strnsave(oldname, STRLEN(oldname) + 3); | |
4904 | |
4905 if (p != NULL) | |
4906 { | |
4907 STRCPY(p + STRLEN(p), " 10"); | |
4908 if (oldname != oldval) | |
4909 vim_free(oldname); | |
4910 oldname = p; | |
4911 } | |
4912 } | |
4913 | |
4914 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4915 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), (const char *)oldname); | |
4916 | |
4917 if (oldname != oldval) | |
100 | 4918 vim_free(oldname); |
7 | 4919 } |
1959 | 4920 else |
4921 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name( | |
4922 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), DEFAULT_FONT); | |
7 | 4923 |
4924 response = gtk_dialog_run(GTK_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
4925 | |
4926 if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_OK) | |
4927 { | |
4928 char *name; | |
4929 | |
4930 name = gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name( | |
4931 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog)); | |
4932 if (name != NULL) | |
4933 { | |
714 | 4934 char_u *p; |
4935 | |
4936 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape | |
4937 * that, because in 'guifont' it separates names. */ | |
4938 p = vim_strsave_escaped((char_u *)name, (char_u *)","); | |
4939 g_free(name); | |
840 | 4940 if (p != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) |
714 | 4941 { |
4942 fontname = string_convert(&input_conv, p, NULL); | |
4943 vim_free(p); | |
4944 } | |
7 | 4945 else |
714 | 4946 fontname = p; |
7 | 4947 } |
4948 } | |
4949 | |
4950 if (response != GTK_RESPONSE_NONE) | |
4951 gtk_widget_destroy(dialog); | |
4952 | |
4953 return fontname; | |
4954 } | |
4955 | |
4956 /* | |
4957 * Some monospace fonts don't support a bold weight, and fall back | |
4958 * silently to the regular weight. But this is no good since our text | |
4959 * drawing function can emulate bold by overstriking. So let's try | |
4960 * to detect whether bold weight is actually available and emulate it | |
4961 * otherwise. | |
4962 * | |
4963 * Note that we don't need to check for italic style since Xft can | |
4964 * emulate italic on its own, provided you have a proper fontconfig | |
4965 * setup. We wouldn't be able to emulate it in Vim anyway. | |
4966 */ | |
4967 static void | |
4968 get_styled_font_variants(void) | |
4969 { | |
4970 PangoFontDescription *bold_font_desc; | |
4971 PangoFont *plain_font; | |
4972 PangoFont *bold_font; | |
4973 | |
4974 gui.font_can_bold = FALSE; | |
4975 | |
4976 plain_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font); | |
4977 | |
4978 if (plain_font == NULL) | |
4979 return; | |
4980 | |
4981 bold_font_desc = pango_font_description_copy_static(gui.norm_font); | |
4982 pango_font_description_set_weight(bold_font_desc, PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD); | |
4983 | |
4984 bold_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, bold_font_desc); | |
4985 /* | |
4986 * The comparison relies on the unique handle nature of a PangoFont*, | |
4987 * i.e. it's assumed that a different PangoFont* won't refer to the | |
4988 * same font. Seems to work, and failing here isn't critical anyway. | |
4989 */ | |
4990 if (bold_font != NULL) | |
4991 { | |
4992 gui.font_can_bold = (bold_font != plain_font); | |
4993 g_object_unref(bold_font); | |
4994 } | |
4995 | |
4996 pango_font_description_free(bold_font_desc); | |
4997 g_object_unref(plain_font); | |
4998 } | |
4999 | |
5000 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5001 | |
5002 /* | |
5003 * There is only one excuse I can give for the following attempt to manage font | |
5004 * styles: | |
5005 * | |
5006 * I HATE THE BRAIN DEAD WAY X11 IS HANDLING FONTS (--mdcki) | |
5007 * (Me too. --danielk) | |
5008 */ | |
5009 static void | |
5010 get_styled_font_variants(char_u * font_name) | |
5011 { | |
5012 char *chunk[32]; | |
5013 char *sdup; | |
5014 char *tmp; | |
5015 int len, i; | |
5016 GuiFont *styled_font[3]; | |
5017 | |
5018 styled_font[0] = &gui.bold_font; | |
5019 styled_font[1] = &gui.ital_font; | |
5020 styled_font[2] = &gui.boldital_font; | |
5021 | |
1884 | 5022 /* First free whatever was previously there. */ |
7 | 5023 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i) |
5024 if (*styled_font[i]) | |
5025 { | |
5026 gdk_font_unref(*styled_font[i]); | |
5027 *styled_font[i] = NULL; | |
5028 } | |
5029 | |
5030 if ((sdup = g_strdup((const char *)font_name)) == NULL) | |
5031 return; | |
5032 | |
5033 /* split up the whole */ | |
5034 i = 0; | |
5035 for (tmp = sdup; *tmp != '\0'; ++tmp) | |
5036 { | |
5037 if (*tmp == '-') | |
5038 { | |
5039 *tmp = '\0'; | |
5040 | |
5041 if (i == 32) | |
5042 break; | |
5043 | |
5044 chunk[i] = tmp + 1; | |
5045 ++i; | |
5046 } | |
5047 } | |
5048 | |
5049 if (i == 14) | |
5050 { | |
5051 GdkFont *font = NULL; | |
5052 const char *bold_chunk[3] = { "bold", NULL, "bold" }; | |
5053 const char *italic_chunk[3] = { NULL, "o", "o" }; | |
5054 | |
5055 /* font name was complete */ | |
5056 len = strlen((const char *)font_name) + 32; | |
5057 | |
5058 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i) | |
5059 { | |
5060 char *styled_name; | |
5061 int j; | |
5062 | |
5063 styled_name = (char *)alloc(len); | |
5064 if (styled_name == NULL) | |
5065 { | |
5066 g_free(sdup); | |
5067 return; | |
5068 } | |
5069 | |
5070 *styled_name = '\0'; | |
5071 | |
5072 for (j = 0; j < 14; ++j) | |
5073 { | |
5074 strcat(styled_name, "-"); | |
5075 if (j == 2 && bold_chunk[i] != NULL) | |
5076 strcat(styled_name, bold_chunk[i]); | |
5077 else if (j == 3 && italic_chunk[i] != NULL) | |
5078 strcat(styled_name, italic_chunk[i]); | |
5079 else | |
5080 strcat(styled_name, chunk[j]); | |
5081 } | |
5082 | |
5083 font = gui_mch_get_font((char_u *)styled_name, FALSE); | |
5084 if (font != NULL) | |
5085 *styled_font[i] = font; | |
5086 | |
5087 vim_free(styled_name); | |
5088 } | |
5089 } | |
5090 | |
5091 g_free(sdup); | |
5092 } | |
5093 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5094 | |
5095 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5096 static PangoEngineShape *default_shape_engine = NULL; | |
5097 | |
5098 /* | |
5099 * Create a map from ASCII characters in the range [32,126] to glyphs | |
5100 * of the current font. This is used by gui_gtk2_draw_string() to skip | |
5101 * the itemize and shaping process for the most common case. | |
5102 */ | |
5103 static void | |
5104 ascii_glyph_table_init(void) | |
5105 { | |
5106 char_u ascii_chars[128]; | |
5107 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
5108 GList *item_list; | |
5109 int i; | |
5110 | |
5111 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
5112 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
5113 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL) | |
5114 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font); | |
5115 | |
5116 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL; | |
5117 gui.ascii_font = NULL; | |
5118 | |
5119 /* For safety, fill in question marks for the control characters. */ | |
5120 for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i) | |
5121 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
5122 for (; i < 127; ++i) | |
5123 ascii_chars[i] = i; | |
5124 ascii_chars[i] = '?'; | |
5125 | |
5126 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
5127 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, (const char *)ascii_chars, | |
5128 0, sizeof(ascii_chars), attr_list, NULL); | |
5129 | |
5130 if (item_list != NULL && item_list->next == NULL) /* play safe */ | |
5131 { | |
5132 PangoItem *item; | |
5133 int width; | |
5134 | |
5135 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
5136 width = gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
5137 | |
5138 /* Remember the shape engine used for ASCII. */ | |
5139 default_shape_engine = item->analysis.shape_engine; | |
5140 | |
5141 gui.ascii_font = item->analysis.font; | |
5142 g_object_ref(gui.ascii_font); | |
5143 | |
5144 gui.ascii_glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
5145 | |
5146 pango_shape((const char *)ascii_chars, sizeof(ascii_chars), | |
5147 &item->analysis, gui.ascii_glyphs); | |
5148 | |
5149 g_return_if_fail(gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs == sizeof(ascii_chars)); | |
5150 | |
5151 for (i = 0; i < gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
5152 { | |
5153 PangoGlyphGeometry *geom; | |
5154 | |
5155 geom = &gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry; | |
5156 geom->x_offset += MAX(0, width - geom->width) / 2; | |
5157 geom->width = width; | |
5158 } | |
5159 } | |
5160 | |
5161 g_list_foreach(item_list, (GFunc)&pango_item_free, NULL); | |
5162 g_list_free(item_list); | |
5163 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
5164 } | |
5165 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5166 | |
5167 /* | |
5168 * Initialize Vim to use the font or fontset with the given name. | |
5169 * Return FAIL if the font could not be loaded, OK otherwise. | |
5170 */ | |
5171 int | |
1884 | 5172 gui_mch_init_font(char_u *font_name, int fontset UNUSED) |
7 | 5173 { |
5174 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5175 PangoFontDescription *font_desc; | |
5176 PangoLayout *layout; | |
5177 int width; | |
5178 | |
5179 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should | |
5180 * be present on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. */ | |
5181 if (font_name == NULL) | |
5182 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT; | |
5183 | |
5184 font_desc = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE); | |
5185 | |
5186 if (font_desc == NULL) | |
5187 return FAIL; | |
5188 | |
5189 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font); | |
5190 gui.norm_font = font_desc; | |
5191 | |
5192 pango_context_set_font_description(gui.text_context, font_desc); | |
5193 | |
5194 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context); | |
5195 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "MW", 2); | |
5196 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL); | |
5197 /* | |
5198 * Set char_width to half the width obtained from pango_layout_get_size() | |
5199 * for CJK fixed_width/bi-width fonts. An unpatched version of Xft leads | |
5200 * Pango to use the same width for both non-CJK characters (e.g. Latin | |
5201 * letters and numbers) and CJK characters. This results in 's p a c e d | |
5202 * o u t' rendering when a CJK 'fixed width' font is used. To work around | |
5203 * that, divide the width returned by Pango by 2 if cjk_width is equal to | |
5204 * width for CJK fonts. | |
5205 * | |
5206 * For related bugs, see: | |
5207 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106618 | |
5208 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106624 | |
5209 * | |
5210 * With this, for all four of the following cases, Vim works fine: | |
5211 * guifont=CJK_fixed_width_font | |
5212 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font | |
5213 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font,CJK_Fixed_font | |
5214 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font guifontwide=CJK_fixed_font | |
5215 */ | |
5216 if (is_cjk_font(gui.norm_font)) | |
5217 { | |
5218 int cjk_width; | |
5219 | |
5220 /* Measure the text extent of U+4E00 and U+4E8C */ | |
5221 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "\344\270\200\344\272\214", -1); | |
5222 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &cjk_width, NULL); | |
5223 | |
5224 if (width == cjk_width) /* Xft not patched */ | |
5225 width /= 2; | |
5226 } | |
5227 g_object_unref(layout); | |
5228 | |
5229 gui.char_width = (width / 2 + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE; | |
5230 | |
5231 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */ | |
5232 if (gui.char_width <= 0) | |
5233 gui.char_width = 8; | |
5234 | |
445 | 5235 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(); |
7 | 5236 |
5237 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */ | |
5238 hl_set_font_name(font_name); | |
5239 | |
5240 get_styled_font_variants(); | |
5241 ascii_glyph_table_init(); | |
5242 | |
5243 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */ | |
5244 if (gui.wide_font != NULL | |
5245 && pango_font_description_equal(gui.norm_font, gui.wide_font)) | |
5246 { | |
5247 pango_font_description_free(gui.wide_font); | |
5248 gui.wide_font = NULL; | |
5249 } | |
5250 | |
5251 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5252 | |
5253 GdkFont *font = NULL; | |
5254 | |
5255 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
5256 /* Try loading a fontset. If this fails we try loading a normal font. */ | |
5257 if (fontset && font_name != NULL) | |
5258 font = gui_mch_get_fontset(font_name, TRUE, TRUE); | |
5259 | |
5260 if (font == NULL) | |
5261 # endif | |
5262 { | |
5263 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should | |
5264 * be present on all X11 servers. */ | |
5265 if (font_name == NULL) | |
5266 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT; | |
5267 font = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE); | |
5268 } | |
5269 | |
5270 if (font == NULL) | |
5271 return FAIL; | |
5272 | |
5273 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font); | |
5274 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
5275 gui_mch_free_fontset(gui.fontset); | |
5276 if (font->type == GDK_FONT_FONTSET) | |
5277 { | |
5278 gui.norm_font = NOFONT; | |
5279 gui.fontset = (GuiFontset)font; | |
5280 /* Use two bytes, this works around the problem that the result would | |
5281 * be zero if no 8-bit font was found. */ | |
5282 gui.char_width = gdk_string_width(font, "xW") / 2; | |
5283 } | |
5284 else | |
5285 # endif | |
5286 { | |
5287 gui.norm_font = font; | |
5288 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
5289 gui.fontset = NOFONTSET; | |
5290 # endif | |
5291 gui.char_width = ((XFontStruct *) | |
5292 GDK_FONT_XFONT(font))->max_bounds.width; | |
5293 } | |
5294 | |
5295 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */ | |
5296 if (gui.char_width <= 0) | |
5297 gui.char_width = 8; | |
5298 | |
5299 gui.char_height = font->ascent + font->descent + p_linespace; | |
5300 gui.char_ascent = font->ascent + p_linespace / 2; | |
5301 | |
5302 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens | |
5303 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */ | |
5304 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0); | |
5305 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1); | |
5306 | |
5307 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */ | |
5308 hl_set_font_name(font_name); | |
5309 | |
5310 if (font->type != GDK_FONT_FONTSET) | |
5311 get_styled_font_variants(font_name); | |
5312 | |
5313 /* Synchronize the fonts used in user input dialogs, since otherwise | |
5314 * search/replace will be esp. annoying in case of international font | |
5315 * usage. | |
5316 */ | |
5317 gui_gtk_synch_fonts(); | |
5318 | |
5319 # ifdef FEAT_XIM | |
5320 /* Adjust input management behaviour to the capabilities of the new | |
5321 * fontset */ | |
5322 xim_decide_input_style(); | |
5323 if (xim_get_status_area_height()) | |
5324 { | |
5325 /* Status area is required. Just create the empty container so that | |
5326 * mainwin will allocate the extra space for status area. */ | |
5327 GtkWidget *alignment = gtk_alignment_new((gfloat)0.5, (gfloat)0.5, | |
5328 (gfloat)1.0, (gfloat)1.0); | |
5329 | |
5330 gtk_widget_set_usize(alignment, 20, gui.char_height + 2); | |
5331 gtk_box_pack_end(GTK_BOX(GTK_BIN(gui.mainwin)->child), | |
5332 alignment, FALSE, FALSE, 0); | |
5333 gtk_widget_show(alignment); | |
5334 } | |
5335 # endif | |
5336 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5337 | |
1986 | 5338 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
5339 if (gui_mch_maximized()) | |
5340 { | |
5341 int w, h; | |
5342 | |
5343 /* Update lines and columns in accordance with the new font, keep the | |
5344 * window maximized. */ | |
5345 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &w, &h); | |
5346 w -= get_menu_tool_width(); | |
5347 h -= get_menu_tool_height(); | |
5348 gui_resize_shell(w, h); | |
5349 } | |
5350 else | |
5351 #endif | |
5352 { | |
5353 /* Preserve the logical dimensions of the screen. */ | |
5354 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); | |
5355 } | |
7 | 5356 |
5357 return OK; | |
5358 } | |
5359 | |
5360 /* | |
5361 * Get a reference to the font "name". | |
5362 * Return zero for failure. | |
5363 */ | |
5364 GuiFont | |
5365 gui_mch_get_font(char_u *name, int report_error) | |
5366 { | |
5367 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5368 PangoFontDescription *font; | |
5369 #else | |
5370 GdkFont *font; | |
5371 #endif | |
5372 | |
5373 /* can't do this when GUI is not running */ | |
5374 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL) | |
5375 return NULL; | |
5376 | |
5377 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5378 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
5379 { | |
5380 char_u *buf; | |
5381 | |
5382 buf = string_convert(&output_conv, name, NULL); | |
5383 if (buf != NULL) | |
5384 { | |
5385 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)buf); | |
5386 vim_free(buf); | |
5387 } | |
5388 else | |
5389 font = NULL; | |
5390 } | |
5391 else | |
5392 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)name); | |
5393 | |
5394 if (font != NULL) | |
5395 { | |
5396 PangoFont *real_font; | |
5397 | |
5398 /* pango_context_load_font() bails out if no font size is set */ | |
5399 if (pango_font_description_get_size(font) <= 0) | |
5400 pango_font_description_set_size(font, 10 * PANGO_SCALE); | |
5401 | |
5402 real_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font); | |
5403 | |
5404 if (real_font == NULL) | |
5405 { | |
5406 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
5407 font = NULL; | |
5408 } | |
5409 else | |
5410 g_object_unref(real_font); | |
5411 } | |
5412 #else | |
5413 font = gdk_font_load((const gchar *)name); | |
5414 #endif | |
5415 | |
5416 if (font == NULL) | |
5417 { | |
5418 if (report_error) | |
1666 | 5419 EMSG2(_((char *)e_font), name); |
7 | 5420 return NULL; |
5421 } | |
5422 | |
5423 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5424 /* | |
5425 * The fixed-width check has been disabled for GTK+ 2. Rationale: | |
5426 * | |
5427 * - The check tends to report false positives, particularly | |
5428 * in non-Latin locales or with old X fonts. | |
5429 * - Thanks to our fixed-width hack in gui_gtk2_draw_string(), | |
5430 * GTK+ 2 Vim is actually capable of displaying variable width | |
5431 * fonts. Those will just be spaced out like in AA xterm. | |
5432 * - Failing here for the default font causes GUI startup to fail | |
5433 * even with wiped out configuration files. | |
5434 * - The font dialog displays all fonts unfiltered, and it's rather | |
5435 * annoying if 95% of the listed fonts produce an error message. | |
5436 */ | |
5437 # if 0 | |
5438 { | |
5439 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font. Naturally, this is a bit | |
5440 * hackish -- fixed-width isn't really suitable for i18n text :/ */ | |
5441 PangoLayout *layout; | |
5442 unsigned int i; | |
5443 int last_width = -1; | |
5444 const char test_chars[] = { 'W', 'i', ',', 'x' }; /* arbitrary */ | |
5445 | |
5446 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context); | |
5447 pango_layout_set_font_description(layout, font); | |
5448 | |
5449 for (i = 0; i < G_N_ELEMENTS(test_chars); ++i) | |
5450 { | |
5451 int width; | |
5452 | |
5453 pango_layout_set_text(layout, &test_chars[i], 1); | |
5454 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL); | |
5455 | |
5456 if (last_width >= 0 && width != last_width) | |
5457 { | |
5458 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
5459 font = NULL; | |
5460 break; | |
5461 } | |
5462 | |
5463 last_width = width; | |
5464 } | |
5465 | |
5466 g_object_unref(layout); | |
5467 } | |
5468 # endif | |
5469 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5470 { | |
5471 XFontStruct *xfont; | |
5472 | |
5473 /* reference this font as being in use */ | |
5474 gdk_font_ref(font); | |
5475 | |
5476 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font. | |
5477 */ | |
5478 xfont = (XFontStruct *) GDK_FONT_XFONT(font); | |
5479 | |
5480 if (xfont->max_bounds.width != xfont->min_bounds.width) | |
5481 { | |
5482 gdk_font_unref(font); | |
5483 font = NULL; | |
5484 } | |
5485 } | |
5486 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5487 | |
5488 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || 0 /* disabled for GTK+ 2, see above */ | |
5489 if (font == NULL && report_error) | |
5490 EMSG2(_(e_fontwidth), name); | |
5491 #endif | |
5492 | |
5493 return font; | |
5494 } | |
5495 | |
39 | 5496 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) |
38 | 5497 /* |
5498 * Return the name of font "font" in allocated memory. | |
5499 */ | |
5500 char_u * | |
1884 | 5501 gui_mch_get_fontname(GuiFont font, char_u *name UNUSED) |
38 | 5502 { |
39 | 5503 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
38 | 5504 if (font != NOFONT) |
5505 { | |
944 | 5506 char *pangoname = pango_font_description_to_string(font); |
5507 | |
5508 if (pangoname != NULL) | |
38 | 5509 { |
944 | 5510 char_u *s = vim_strsave((char_u *)pangoname); |
5511 | |
5512 g_free(pangoname); | |
38 | 5513 return s; |
5514 } | |
5515 } | |
39 | 5516 # else |
38 | 5517 /* Don't know how to get the name, return what we got. */ |
5518 if (name != NULL) | |
5519 return vim_strsave(name); | |
39 | 5520 # endif |
38 | 5521 return NULL; |
5522 } | |
39 | 5523 #endif |
38 | 5524 |
7 | 5525 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) |
5526 /* | |
5527 * Set the current text font. | |
5528 * Since we create all GC on demand, we use just gui.current_font to | |
5529 * indicate the desired current font. | |
5530 */ | |
5531 void | |
5532 gui_mch_set_font(GuiFont font) | |
5533 { | |
5534 gui.current_font = font; | |
5535 } | |
5536 #endif | |
5537 | |
5538 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO) | |
5539 /* | |
5540 * Set the current text fontset. | |
5541 */ | |
5542 void | |
5543 gui_mch_set_fontset(GuiFontset fontset) | |
5544 { | |
5545 gui.current_font = fontset; | |
5546 } | |
5547 #endif | |
5548 | |
5549 /* | |
5550 * If a font is not going to be used, free its structure. | |
5551 */ | |
5552 void | |
5553 gui_mch_free_font(GuiFont font) | |
5554 { | |
5555 if (font != NOFONT) | |
5556 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5557 pango_font_description_free(font); | |
5558 #else | |
5559 gdk_font_unref(font); | |
5560 #endif | |
5561 } | |
5562 | |
5563 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO) | |
5564 /* | |
5565 * If a fontset is not going to be used, free its structure. | |
5566 */ | |
5567 void | |
5568 gui_mch_free_fontset(GuiFontset fontset) | |
5569 { | |
5570 if (fontset != NOFONTSET) | |
5571 gdk_font_unref(fontset); | |
5572 } | |
5573 #endif | |
5574 | |
5575 | |
5576 /* | |
5577 * Return the Pixel value (color) for the given color name. This routine was | |
5578 * pretty much taken from example code in the Silicon Graphics OSF/Motif | |
5579 * Programmer's Guide. | |
5580 * Return INVALCOLOR for error. | |
5581 */ | |
5582 guicolor_T | |
5583 gui_mch_get_color(char_u *name) | |
5584 { | |
5585 /* A number of colors that some X11 systems don't have */ | |
5586 static const char *const vimnames[][2] = | |
5587 { | |
834 | 5588 {"LightRed", "#FFBBBB"}, |
5589 {"LightGreen", "#88FF88"}, | |
5590 {"LightMagenta","#FFBBFF"}, | |
5591 {"DarkCyan", "#008888"}, | |
5592 {"DarkBlue", "#0000BB"}, | |
5593 {"DarkRed", "#BB0000"}, | |
5594 {"DarkMagenta", "#BB00BB"}, | |
5595 {"DarkGrey", "#BBBBBB"}, | |
5596 {"DarkYellow", "#BBBB00"}, | |
5597 {"Gray10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
5598 {"Grey10", "#1A1A1A"}, | |
5599 {"Gray20", "#333333"}, | |
5600 {"Grey20", "#333333"}, | |
5601 {"Gray30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
5602 {"Grey30", "#4D4D4D"}, | |
5603 {"Gray40", "#666666"}, | |
5604 {"Grey40", "#666666"}, | |
5605 {"Gray50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
5606 {"Grey50", "#7F7F7F"}, | |
5607 {"Gray60", "#999999"}, | |
5608 {"Grey60", "#999999"}, | |
5609 {"Gray70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
5610 {"Grey70", "#B3B3B3"}, | |
5611 {"Gray80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
5612 {"Grey80", "#CCCCCC"}, | |
5613 {"Gray90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
5614 {"Grey90", "#E5E5E5"}, | |
7 | 5615 {NULL, NULL} |
5616 }; | |
5617 | |
5618 if (!gui.in_use) /* can't do this when GUI not running */ | |
5619 return INVALCOLOR; | |
5620 | |
5621 while (name != NULL) | |
5622 { | |
5623 GdkColor color; | |
5624 int parsed; | |
5625 int i; | |
5626 | |
5627 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const char *)name, &color); | |
5628 | |
5629 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* ohh, lovely GTK+ 2, eases our pain :) */ | |
5630 /* | |
5631 * Since we have already called gtk_set_locale here the bugger | |
5632 * XParseColor will accept only explicit color names in the language | |
1226 | 5633 * of the current locale. However this will interfere with: |
7 | 5634 * 1. Vim's global startup files |
5635 * 2. Explicit color names in .vimrc | |
5636 * | |
5637 * Therefore we first try to parse the color in the current locale and | |
5638 * if it fails, we fall back to the portable "C" one. | |
5639 */ | |
5640 if (!parsed) | |
5641 { | |
5642 char *current; | |
5643 | |
5644 current = setlocale(LC_ALL, NULL); | |
5645 if (current != NULL) | |
5646 { | |
5647 char *saved; | |
5648 | |
5649 saved = g_strdup(current); | |
5650 setlocale(LC_ALL, "C"); | |
5651 | |
5652 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const gchar *)name, &color); | |
5653 | |
5654 setlocale(LC_ALL, saved); | |
5655 gtk_set_locale(); | |
5656 | |
5657 g_free(saved); | |
5658 } | |
5659 } | |
5660 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5661 | |
5662 if (parsed) | |
5663 { | |
5664 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
5665 gdk_colormap_alloc_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
5666 &color, FALSE, TRUE); | |
5667 #else | |
5668 gdk_color_alloc(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), &color); | |
5669 #endif | |
5670 return (guicolor_T)color.pixel; | |
5671 } | |
5672 /* add a few builtin names and try again */ | |
5673 for (i = 0; ; ++i) | |
5674 { | |
5675 if (vimnames[i][0] == NULL) | |
5676 { | |
5677 name = NULL; | |
5678 break; | |
5679 } | |
5680 if (STRICMP(name, vimnames[i][0]) == 0) | |
5681 { | |
5682 name = (char_u *)vimnames[i][1]; | |
5683 break; | |
5684 } | |
5685 } | |
5686 } | |
5687 | |
5688 return INVALCOLOR; | |
5689 } | |
5690 | |
5691 /* | |
5692 * Set the current text foreground color. | |
5693 */ | |
5694 void | |
5695 gui_mch_set_fg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
5696 { | |
5697 gui.fgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
5698 } | |
5699 | |
5700 /* | |
5701 * Set the current text background color. | |
5702 */ | |
5703 void | |
5704 gui_mch_set_bg_color(guicolor_T color) | |
5705 { | |
5706 gui.bgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
5707 } | |
5708 | |
207 | 5709 /* |
5710 * Set the current text special color. | |
5711 */ | |
5712 void | |
5713 gui_mch_set_sp_color(guicolor_T color) | |
5714 { | |
5715 gui.spcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color; | |
5716 } | |
5717 | |
7 | 5718 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 |
5719 /* | |
5720 * Function-like convenience macro for the sake of efficiency. | |
5721 */ | |
5722 #define INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(Attribute, AttrList, Start, End) \ | |
5723 G_STMT_START{ \ | |
5724 PangoAttribute *tmp_attr_; \ | |
5725 tmp_attr_ = (Attribute); \ | |
5726 tmp_attr_->start_index = (Start); \ | |
5727 tmp_attr_->end_index = (End); \ | |
5728 pango_attr_list_insert((AttrList), tmp_attr_); \ | |
5729 }G_STMT_END | |
5730 | |
5731 static void | |
5732 apply_wide_font_attr(char_u *s, int len, PangoAttrList *attr_list) | |
5733 { | |
5734 char_u *start = NULL; | |
5735 char_u *p; | |
5736 int uc; | |
5737 | |
5738 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
5739 { | |
5740 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
5741 | |
5742 if (start == NULL) | |
5743 { | |
5744 if (uc >= 0x80 && utf_char2cells(uc) == 2) | |
5745 start = p; | |
5746 } | |
5747 else if (uc < 0x80 /* optimization shortcut */ | |
5748 || (utf_char2cells(uc) != 2 && !utf_iscomposing(uc))) | |
5749 { | |
5750 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
5751 attr_list, start - s, p - s); | |
5752 start = NULL; | |
5753 } | |
5754 } | |
5755 | |
5756 if (start != NULL) | |
5757 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font), | |
5758 attr_list, start - s, len); | |
5759 } | |
5760 | |
5761 static int | |
5762 count_cluster_cells(char_u *s, PangoItem *item, | |
5763 PangoGlyphString* glyphs, int i, | |
5764 int *cluster_width, | |
5765 int *last_glyph_rbearing) | |
5766 { | |
5767 char_u *p; | |
5768 int next; /* glyph start index of next cluster */ | |
5769 int start, end; /* string segment of current cluster */ | |
5770 int width; /* real cluster width in Pango units */ | |
5771 int uc; | |
5772 int cellcount = 0; | |
5773 | |
5774 width = glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width; | |
5775 | |
5776 for (next = i + 1; next < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++next) | |
5777 { | |
5778 if (glyphs->glyphs[next].attr.is_cluster_start) | |
5779 break; | |
5780 else if (glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width > width) | |
5781 width = glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width; | |
5782 } | |
5783 | |
5784 start = item->offset + glyphs->log_clusters[i]; | |
5785 end = item->offset + ((next < glyphs->num_glyphs) ? | |
5786 glyphs->log_clusters[next] : item->length); | |
5787 | |
5788 for (p = s + start; p < s + end; p += utf_byte2len(*p)) | |
5789 { | |
5790 uc = utf_ptr2char(p); | |
5791 if (uc < 0x80) | |
5792 ++cellcount; | |
5793 else if (!utf_iscomposing(uc)) | |
5794 cellcount += utf_char2cells(uc); | |
5795 } | |
5796 | |
5797 if (last_glyph_rbearing != NULL | |
5798 && cellcount > 0 && next == glyphs->num_glyphs) | |
5799 { | |
5800 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
5801 /* | |
5802 * If a certain combining mark had to be taken from a non-monospace | |
5803 * font, we have to compensate manually by adapting x_offset according | |
5804 * to the ink extents of the previous glyph. | |
5805 */ | |
5806 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
5807 glyphs->glyphs[i].glyph, | |
5808 &ink_rect, NULL); | |
5809 | |
5810 if (PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect) > 0) | |
5811 *last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect); | |
5812 } | |
5813 | |
5814 if (cellcount > 0) | |
5815 *cluster_width = width; | |
5816 | |
5817 return cellcount; | |
5818 } | |
5819 | |
5820 /* | |
5821 * If there are only combining characters in the cluster, we cannot just | |
5822 * change the width of the previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
5823 * some guesswork is needed. | |
5824 * | |
5825 * If ink_rect.x is negative Pango apparently has taken care of the composing | |
5826 * by itself. Actually setting x_offset = 0 should be sufficient then, but due | |
5827 * to problems with composing from different fonts we still need to fine-tune | |
5828 * x_offset to avoid uglyness. | |
5829 * | |
5830 * If ink_rect.x is not negative, force overstriking by pointing x_offset to | |
5831 * the position of the previous glyph. Apparently this happens only with old | |
5832 * X fonts which don't provide the special combining information needed by | |
5833 * Pango. | |
5834 */ | |
5835 static void | |
5836 setup_zero_width_cluster(PangoItem *item, PangoGlyphInfo *glyph, | |
5837 int last_cellcount, int last_cluster_width, | |
5838 int last_glyph_rbearing) | |
5839 { | |
5840 PangoRectangle ink_rect; | |
5841 PangoRectangle logical_rect; | |
5842 int width; | |
5843 | |
5844 width = last_cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
5845 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - last_cluster_width) / 2; | |
5846 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
5847 | |
5848 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font, | |
5849 glyph->glyph, | |
5850 &ink_rect, &logical_rect); | |
5851 if (ink_rect.x < 0) | |
5852 { | |
5853 glyph->geometry.x_offset += last_glyph_rbearing; | |
5854 glyph->geometry.y_offset = logical_rect.height | |
5855 - (gui.char_height - p_linespace) * PANGO_SCALE; | |
5856 } | |
5857 } | |
5858 | |
5859 static void | |
5860 draw_glyph_string(int row, int col, int num_cells, int flags, | |
5861 PangoFont *font, PangoGlyphString *glyphs) | |
5862 { | |
5863 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP)) | |
5864 { | |
5865 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
5866 | |
5867 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
5868 gui.text_gc, | |
5869 TRUE, | |
5870 FILL_X(col), | |
5871 FILL_Y(row), | |
5872 num_cells * gui.char_width, | |
5873 gui.char_height); | |
5874 } | |
5875 | |
5876 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
5877 | |
5878 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
5879 gui.text_gc, | |
5880 font, | |
5881 TEXT_X(col), | |
5882 TEXT_Y(row), | |
5883 glyphs); | |
5884 | |
5885 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */ | |
5886 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && !gui.font_can_bold) | |
5887 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window, | |
5888 gui.text_gc, | |
5889 font, | |
5890 TEXT_X(col) + 1, | |
5891 TEXT_Y(row), | |
5892 glyphs); | |
5893 } | |
5894 | |
5895 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
5896 | |
207 | 5897 /* |
5898 * Draw underline and undercurl at the bottom of the character cell. | |
5899 */ | |
5900 static void | |
5901 draw_under(int flags, int row, int col, int cells) | |
5902 { | |
5903 int i; | |
5904 int offset; | |
1884 | 5905 static const int val[8] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 2, 2 }; |
207 | 5906 int y = FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1; |
5907 | |
5908 /* Undercurl: draw curl at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
5909 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERC) | |
5910 { | |
5911 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.spcolor); | |
5912 for (i = FILL_X(col); i < FILL_X(col + cells); ++i) | |
5913 { | |
5914 offset = val[i % 8]; | |
5915 gdk_draw_point(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, i, y - offset); | |
5916 } | |
5917 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
5918 } | |
5919 | |
5920 /* Underline: draw a line at the bottom of the character cell. */ | |
5921 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL) | |
5922 { | |
5923 /* When p_linespace is 0, overwrite the bottom row of pixels. | |
5924 * Otherwise put the line just below the character. */ | |
5925 if (p_linespace > 1) | |
5926 y -= p_linespace - 1; | |
5927 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
5928 FILL_X(col), y, | |
5929 FILL_X(col + cells) - 1, y); | |
5930 } | |
5931 } | |
5932 | |
7 | 5933 #if defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) |
5934 int | |
5935 gui_gtk2_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags) | |
5936 { | |
5937 GdkRectangle area; /* area for clip mask */ | |
5938 PangoGlyphString *glyphs; /* glyphs of current item */ | |
5939 int column_offset = 0; /* column offset in cells */ | |
5940 int i; | |
5941 char_u *conv_buf = NULL; /* result of UTF-8 conversion */ | |
5942 char_u *new_conv_buf; | |
5943 int convlen; | |
5944 char_u *sp, *bp; | |
5945 int plen; | |
5946 | |
5947 if (gui.text_context == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
5948 return len; | |
5949 | |
5950 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
5951 { | |
5952 /* | |
5953 * Convert characters from 'encoding' to 'termencoding', which is set | |
5954 * to UTF-8 by gui_mch_init(). did_set_string_option() in option.c | |
5955 * prohibits changing this to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is | |
5956 * in use. | |
5957 */ | |
5958 convlen = len; | |
5959 conv_buf = string_convert(&output_conv, s, &convlen); | |
5960 g_return_val_if_fail(conv_buf != NULL, len); | |
5961 | |
5962 /* Correct for differences in char width: some chars are | |
5963 * double-wide in 'encoding' but single-wide in utf-8. Add a space to | |
5964 * compensate for that. */ | |
5965 for (sp = s, bp = conv_buf; sp < s + len && bp < conv_buf + convlen; ) | |
5966 { | |
474 | 5967 plen = utf_ptr2len(bp); |
7 | 5968 if ((*mb_ptr2cells)(sp) == 2 && utf_ptr2cells(bp) == 1) |
5969 { | |
5970 new_conv_buf = alloc(convlen + 2); | |
5971 if (new_conv_buf == NULL) | |
5972 return len; | |
5973 plen += bp - conv_buf; | |
5974 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf, conv_buf, plen); | |
5975 new_conv_buf[plen] = ' '; | |
5976 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf + plen + 1, conv_buf + plen, | |
5977 convlen - plen + 1); | |
5978 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
5979 conv_buf = new_conv_buf; | |
5980 ++convlen; | |
5981 bp = conv_buf + plen; | |
5982 plen = 1; | |
5983 } | |
474 | 5984 sp += (*mb_ptr2len)(sp); |
7 | 5985 bp += plen; |
5986 } | |
5987 s = conv_buf; | |
5988 len = convlen; | |
5989 } | |
5990 | |
5991 /* | |
5992 * Restrict all drawing to the current screen line in order to prevent | |
5993 * fuzzy font lookups from messing up the screen. | |
5994 */ | |
5995 area.x = gui.border_offset; | |
5996 area.y = FILL_Y(row); | |
5997 area.width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width; | |
5998 area.height = gui.char_height; | |
5999 | |
6000 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, 0, 0); | |
6001 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, &area); | |
6002 | |
6003 glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new(); | |
6004 | |
6005 /* | |
6006 * Optimization hack: If possible, skip the itemize and shaping process | |
6007 * for pure ASCII strings. This optimization is particularly effective | |
6008 * because Vim draws space characters to clear parts of the screen. | |
6009 */ | |
6010 if (!(flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
6011 && !((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
6012 && gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL) | |
6013 { | |
6014 char_u *p; | |
6015 | |
6016 for (p = s; p < s + len; ++p) | |
6017 if (*p & 0x80) | |
6018 goto not_ascii; | |
6019 | |
6020 pango_glyph_string_set_size(glyphs, len); | |
6021 | |
6022 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
6023 { | |
6024 glyphs->glyphs[i] = gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[s[i]]; | |
6025 glyphs->log_clusters[i] = i; | |
6026 } | |
6027 | |
6028 draw_glyph_string(row, col, len, flags, gui.ascii_font, glyphs); | |
6029 | |
6030 column_offset = len; | |
6031 } | |
6032 else | |
6033 not_ascii: | |
6034 { | |
6035 PangoAttrList *attr_list; | |
6036 GList *item_list; | |
6037 int cluster_width; | |
6038 int last_glyph_rbearing; | |
6039 int cells = 0; /* cells occupied by current cluster */ | |
497 | 6040 #if 0 |
6041 int monospace13 = STRICMP(p_guifont, "monospace 13") == 0; | |
6042 #endif | |
7 | 6043 |
26 | 6044 /* Safety check: pango crashes when invoked with invalid utf-8 |
6045 * characters. */ | |
6046 if (!utf_valid_string(s, s + len)) | |
6047 { | |
6048 column_offset = len; | |
6049 goto skipitall; | |
6050 } | |
6051 | |
7 | 6052 /* original width of the current cluster */ |
6053 cluster_width = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
6054 | |
6055 /* right bearing of the last non-composing glyph */ | |
6056 last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width; | |
6057 | |
6058 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new(); | |
6059 | |
6060 /* If 'guifontwide' is set then use that for double-width characters. | |
6061 * Otherwise just go with 'guifont' and let Pango do its thing. */ | |
6062 if (gui.wide_font != NULL) | |
6063 apply_wide_font_attr(s, len, attr_list); | |
6064 | |
6065 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold) | |
6066 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_weight_new(PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD), | |
6067 attr_list, 0, len); | |
6068 if (flags & DRAW_ITALIC) | |
6069 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_style_new(PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC), | |
6070 attr_list, 0, len); | |
6071 /* | |
6072 * Break the text into segments with consistent directional level | |
6073 * and shaping engine. Pure Latin text needs only a single segment, | |
6074 * so there's no need to worry about the loop's efficiency. Better | |
6075 * try to optimize elsewhere, e.g. reducing exposes and stuff :) | |
6076 */ | |
6077 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, | |
6078 (const char *)s, 0, len, attr_list, NULL); | |
6079 | |
6080 while (item_list != NULL) | |
6081 { | |
6082 PangoItem *item; | |
6083 int item_cells = 0; /* item length in cells */ | |
6084 | |
6085 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data; | |
6086 item_list = g_list_delete_link(item_list, item_list); | |
6087 /* | |
6088 * Increment the bidirectional embedding level by 1 if it is not | |
6089 * even. An odd number means the output will be RTL, but we don't | |
6090 * want that since Vim handles right-to-left text on its own. It | |
6091 * would probably be sufficient to just set level = 0, but you can | |
6092 * never know :) | |
6093 * | |
6094 * Unfortunately we can't take advantage of Pango's ability to | |
6095 * render both LTR and RTL at the same time. In order to support | |
6096 * that, Vim's main screen engine would have to make use of Pango | |
6097 * functionality. | |
6098 */ | |
6099 item->analysis.level = (item->analysis.level + 1) & (~1U); | |
6100 | |
6101 /* HACK: Overrule the shape engine, we don't want shaping to be | |
6102 * done, because drawing the cursor would change the display. */ | |
6103 item->analysis.shape_engine = default_shape_engine; | |
6104 | |
6105 pango_shape((const char *)s + item->offset, item->length, | |
6106 &item->analysis, glyphs); | |
6107 /* | |
6108 * Fixed-width hack: iterate over the array and assign a fixed | |
6109 * width to each glyph, thus overriding the choice made by the | |
6110 * shaping engine. We use utf_char2cells() to determine the | |
6111 * number of cells needed. | |
6112 * | |
6113 * Also perform all kind of dark magic to get composing | |
6114 * characters right (and pretty too of course). | |
6115 */ | |
6116 for (i = 0; i < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i) | |
6117 { | |
6118 PangoGlyphInfo *glyph; | |
6119 | |
6120 glyph = &glyphs->glyphs[i]; | |
6121 | |
6122 if (glyph->attr.is_cluster_start) | |
6123 { | |
6124 int cellcount; | |
6125 | |
6126 cellcount = count_cluster_cells( | |
6127 s, item, glyphs, i, &cluster_width, | |
6128 (item_list != NULL) ? &last_glyph_rbearing : NULL); | |
6129 | |
6130 if (cellcount > 0) | |
6131 { | |
6132 int width; | |
6133 | |
6134 width = cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
6135 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
6136 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
6137 glyph->geometry.width = width; | |
6138 } | |
6139 else | |
6140 { | |
6141 /* If there are only combining characters in the | |
6142 * cluster, we cannot just change the width of the | |
6143 * previous glyph since there is none. Therefore | |
6144 * some guesswork is needed. */ | |
6145 setup_zero_width_cluster(item, glyph, cells, | |
6146 cluster_width, | |
6147 last_glyph_rbearing); | |
6148 } | |
6149 | |
6150 item_cells += cellcount; | |
6151 cells = cellcount; | |
6152 } | |
6153 else if (i > 0) | |
6154 { | |
6155 int width; | |
6156 | |
6157 /* There is a previous glyph, so we deal with combining | |
6158 * characters the canonical way. That is, setting the | |
6159 * width of the previous glyph to 0. */ | |
6160 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width = 0; | |
6161 width = cells * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE; | |
6162 glyph->geometry.x_offset += | |
6163 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2; | |
497 | 6164 #if 0 |
6165 /* Dirty hack: for "monospace 13" font there is a bug that | |
6166 * draws composing chars in the wrong position. Add | |
6167 * "width" to the offset to work around that. */ | |
6168 if (monospace13) | |
6169 glyph->geometry.x_offset = width; | |
6170 #endif | |
6171 | |
7 | 6172 glyph->geometry.width = width; |
6173 } | |
6174 else /* i == 0 "cannot happen" */ | |
6175 { | |
6176 glyph->geometry.width = 0; | |
6177 } | |
6178 } | |
6179 | |
6180 /*** Aaaaand action! ***/ | |
6181 draw_glyph_string(row, col + column_offset, item_cells, | |
6182 flags, item->analysis.font, glyphs); | |
6183 | |
6184 pango_item_free(item); | |
6185 | |
6186 column_offset += item_cells; | |
6187 } | |
6188 | |
6189 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list); | |
6190 } | |
6191 | |
26 | 6192 skipitall: |
207 | 6193 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */ |
6194 draw_under(flags, row, col, column_offset); | |
7 | 6195 |
6196 pango_glyph_string_free(glyphs); | |
6197 vim_free(conv_buf); | |
6198 | |
6199 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, NULL); | |
6200 | |
6201 return column_offset; | |
6202 } | |
6203 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
6204 | |
6205 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO) | |
6206 void | |
6207 gui_mch_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags) | |
6208 { | |
6209 static XChar2b *buf = NULL; | |
6210 static int buflen = 0; | |
6211 int is_wide; | |
6212 XChar2b *text; | |
6213 int textlen; | |
6214 XFontStruct *xfont; | |
6215 char_u *p; | |
6216 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6217 unsigned c; | |
6218 # endif | |
6219 int width; | |
6220 | |
6221 if (gui.current_font == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6222 return; | |
6223 | |
6224 /* | |
6225 * Yeah yeah apparently the font support in GTK+ 1.2 only cares for either: | |
6226 * asians or 8-bit fonts. It is broken there, but no wonder the whole font | |
6227 * stuff is broken in X11 in first place. And the internationalization API | |
6228 * isn't something you would really like to use. | |
6229 */ | |
6230 | |
6231 xfont = (XFontStruct *)((GdkFontPrivate*)gui.current_font)->xfont; | |
6232 is_wide = ((xfont->min_byte1 != 0 || xfont->max_byte1 != 0) | |
6233 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET | |
6234 && gui.fontset == NOFONTSET | |
6235 # endif | |
6236 ); | |
6237 | |
6238 if (is_wide) | |
6239 { | |
6240 /* Convert a byte sequence to 16 bit characters for the Gdk functions. | |
6241 * Need a buffer for the 16 bit characters. Keep it between calls, | |
6242 * because allocating it each time is slow. */ | |
6243 if (buflen < len) | |
6244 { | |
6245 XtFree((char *)buf); | |
6246 buf = (XChar2b *)XtMalloc(len * sizeof(XChar2b)); | |
6247 buflen = len; | |
6248 } | |
6249 | |
6250 p = s; | |
6251 textlen = 0; | |
6252 width = 0; | |
6253 while (p < s + len) | |
6254 { | |
6255 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6256 if (enc_utf8) | |
6257 { | |
1903 | 6258 int pcc[MAX_MCO]; |
6259 | |
6260 /* TODO: use the composing characters */ | |
2074
1bb06e6512a2
updated for version 7.2.358
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1986
diff
changeset
|
6261 c = utfc_ptr2char_len(p, pcc, len - (p - s)); |
7 | 6262 if (c >= 0x10000) /* show chars > 0xffff as ? */ |
6263 c = 0xbf; | |
6264 buf[textlen].byte1 = c >> 8; | |
6265 buf[textlen].byte2 = c; | |
1903 | 6266 p += utfc_ptr2len_len(p, len - (p - s)); |
7 | 6267 width += utf_char2cells(c); |
6268 } | |
6269 else | |
6270 # endif | |
6271 { | |
6272 buf[textlen].byte1 = '\0'; /* high eight bits */ | |
6273 buf[textlen].byte2 = *p; /* low eight bits */ | |
6274 ++p; | |
6275 ++width; | |
6276 } | |
6277 ++textlen; | |
6278 } | |
6279 text = buf; | |
6280 textlen = textlen * 2; | |
6281 } | |
6282 else | |
6283 { | |
6284 text = (XChar2b *)s; | |
6285 textlen = len; | |
6286 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6287 if (has_mbyte) | |
6288 { | |
6289 width = 0; | |
1903 | 6290 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += (*mb_ptr2len_len)(p, len - (p - s))) |
6291 width += (*mb_ptr2cells_len)(p, len - (p - s)); | |
7 | 6292 } |
6293 else | |
6294 # endif | |
6295 width = len; | |
6296 } | |
6297 | |
6298 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP)) | |
6299 { | |
6300 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
6301 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6302 gui.text_gc, | |
6303 TRUE, | |
6304 FILL_X(col), FILL_Y(row), | |
6305 width * gui.char_width, gui.char_height); | |
6306 } | |
6307 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6308 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6309 gui.current_font, | |
6310 gui.text_gc, | |
6311 TEXT_X(col), TEXT_Y(row), | |
6312 (const gchar *)text, textlen); | |
6313 | |
6314 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */ | |
6315 if (flags & DRAW_BOLD) | |
6316 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6317 gui.current_font, | |
6318 gui.text_gc, | |
6319 TEXT_X(col) + 1, TEXT_Y(row), | |
6320 (const gchar *)text, textlen); | |
6321 | |
207 | 6322 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */ |
6323 draw_under(flags, row, col, width); | |
7 | 6324 } |
6325 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
6326 | |
6327 /* | |
6328 * Return OK if the key with the termcap name "name" is supported. | |
6329 */ | |
6330 int | |
6331 gui_mch_haskey(char_u *name) | |
6332 { | |
6333 int i; | |
6334 | |
6335 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++) | |
6336 if (name[0] == special_keys[i].code0 | |
6337 && name[1] == special_keys[i].code1) | |
6338 return OK; | |
6339 return FAIL; | |
6340 } | |
6341 | |
6342 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) \ | |
6343 || (defined(FEAT_XIM) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)) \ | |
6344 || defined(PROTO) | |
6345 /* | |
6346 * Return the text window-id and display. Only required for X-based GUI's | |
6347 */ | |
6348 int | |
6349 gui_get_x11_windis(Window *win, Display **dis) | |
6350 { | |
6351 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
6352 { | |
6353 *dis = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6354 *win = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6355 return OK; | |
6356 } | |
6357 | |
6358 *dis = NULL; | |
6359 *win = 0; | |
6360 return FAIL; | |
6361 } | |
6362 #endif | |
6363 | |
6364 #if defined(FEAT_CLIENTSERVER) \ | |
6365 || (defined(FEAT_X11) && defined(FEAT_CLIPBOARD)) || defined(PROTO) | |
6366 | |
6367 Display * | |
6368 gui_mch_get_display(void) | |
6369 { | |
6370 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL) | |
6371 return GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6372 else | |
6373 return NULL; | |
6374 } | |
6375 #endif | |
6376 | |
6377 void | |
6378 gui_mch_beep(void) | |
6379 { | |
6380 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
6381 GdkDisplay *display; | |
6382 | |
6383 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
6384 display = gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin); | |
6385 else | |
6386 display = gdk_display_get_default(); | |
6387 | |
6388 if (display != NULL) | |
6389 gdk_display_beep(display); | |
6390 #else | |
6391 gdk_beep(); | |
6392 #endif | |
6393 } | |
6394 | |
6395 void | |
6396 gui_mch_flash(int msec) | |
6397 { | |
6398 GdkGCValues values; | |
6399 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
6400 | |
6401 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6402 return; | |
6403 | |
6404 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
6405 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
6406 values.function = GDK_XOR; | |
6407 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6408 &values, | |
6409 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
6410 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
6411 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
6412 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, | |
6413 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
6414 /* | |
6415 * Do a visual beep by changing back and forth in some undetermined way, | |
6416 * the foreground and background colors. This is due to the fact that | |
6417 * there can't be really any prediction about the effects of XOR on | |
6418 * arbitrary X11 servers. However this seems to be enough for what we | |
6419 * intend it to do. | |
6420 */ | |
6421 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
6422 TRUE, | |
6423 0, 0, | |
6424 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
6425 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
6426 | |
6427 gui_mch_flush(); | |
6428 ui_delay((long)msec, TRUE); /* wait so many msec */ | |
6429 | |
6430 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, | |
6431 TRUE, | |
6432 0, 0, | |
6433 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset, | |
6434 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset); | |
6435 | |
6436 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
6437 } | |
6438 | |
6439 /* | |
6440 * Invert a rectangle from row r, column c, for nr rows and nc columns. | |
6441 */ | |
6442 void | |
6443 gui_mch_invert_rectangle(int r, int c, int nr, int nc) | |
6444 { | |
6445 GdkGCValues values; | |
6446 GdkGC *invert_gc; | |
6447 | |
6448 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6449 return; | |
6450 | |
944 | 6451 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; |
6452 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel; | |
7 | 6453 values.function = GDK_XOR; |
6454 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window, | |
6455 &values, | |
6456 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND | | |
6457 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND | | |
6458 GDK_GC_FUNCTION); | |
944 | 6459 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, gui.visibility != |
6460 GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED); | |
7 | 6461 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc, |
6462 TRUE, | |
6463 FILL_X(c), FILL_Y(r), | |
6464 (nc) * gui.char_width, (nr) * gui.char_height); | |
6465 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc); | |
6466 } | |
6467 | |
6468 /* | |
6469 * Iconify the GUI window. | |
6470 */ | |
6471 void | |
6472 gui_mch_iconify(void) | |
6473 { | |
6474 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6475 gtk_window_iconify(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
6476 #else | |
6477 XIconifyWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), | |
6478 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window), | |
6479 DefaultScreen(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window))); | |
6480 #endif | |
6481 } | |
6482 | |
6483 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO) | |
6484 /* | |
6485 * Bring the Vim window to the foreground. | |
6486 */ | |
6487 void | |
6488 gui_mch_set_foreground(void) | |
6489 { | |
6490 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6491 gtk_window_present(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin)); | |
6492 # else | |
6493 gdk_window_raise(gui.mainwin->window); | |
6494 # endif | |
6495 } | |
6496 #endif | |
6497 | |
6498 /* | |
6499 * Draw a cursor without focus. | |
6500 */ | |
6501 void | |
6502 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(guicolor_T color) | |
6503 { | |
6504 int i = 1; | |
6505 | |
6506 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6507 return; | |
6508 | |
6509 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
6510 | |
6511 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6512 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE | |
6513 if (mb_lefthalve(gui.row, gui.col)) | |
6514 i = 2; | |
6515 #endif | |
6516 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6517 FALSE, | |
6518 FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row), | |
6519 i * gui.char_width - 1, gui.char_height - 1); | |
6520 } | |
6521 | |
6522 /* | |
6523 * Draw part of a cursor, "w" pixels wide, and "h" pixels high, using | |
6524 * color "color". | |
6525 */ | |
6526 void | |
6527 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color) | |
6528 { | |
6529 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6530 return; | |
6531 | |
6532 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color); | |
6533 | |
6534 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6535 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6536 TRUE, | |
6537 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT | |
6538 /* vertical line should be on the right of current point */ | |
6539 CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w : | |
6540 #endif | |
6541 FILL_X(gui.col), | |
6542 FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h, | |
6543 w, h); | |
6544 } | |
6545 | |
6546 | |
6547 /* | |
6548 * Catch up with any queued X11 events. This may put keyboard input into the | |
6549 * input buffer, call resize call-backs, trigger timers etc. If there is | |
6550 * nothing in the X11 event queue (& no timers pending), then we return | |
6551 * immediately. | |
6552 */ | |
6553 void | |
6554 gui_mch_update(void) | |
6555 { | |
6556 while (gtk_events_pending() && !vim_is_input_buf_full()) | |
6557 gtk_main_iteration_do(FALSE); | |
6558 } | |
6559 | |
6560 static gint | |
6561 input_timer_cb(gpointer data) | |
6562 { | |
6563 int *timed_out = (int *) data; | |
6564 | |
1226 | 6565 /* Just inform the caller about the occurrence of it */ |
7 | 6566 *timed_out = TRUE; |
6567 | |
6568 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
6569 gtk_main_quit(); | |
6570 | |
6571 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */ | |
6572 } | |
6573 | |
6574 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
6575 /* | |
6576 * Callback function, used when data is available on the SNiFF connection. | |
6577 */ | |
6578 static void | |
6579 sniff_request_cb( | |
6580 gpointer data, | |
6581 gint source_fd, | |
6582 GdkInputCondition condition) | |
6583 { | |
6584 static char_u bytes[3] = {CSI, (int)KS_EXTRA, (int)KE_SNIFF}; | |
6585 | |
6586 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3); | |
6587 | |
6588 if (gtk_main_level() > 0) | |
6589 gtk_main_quit(); | |
6590 } | |
6591 #endif | |
6592 | |
6593 /* | |
6594 * GUI input routine called by gui_wait_for_chars(). Waits for a character | |
6595 * from the keyboard. | |
6596 * wtime == -1 Wait forever. | |
6597 * wtime == 0 This should never happen. | |
6598 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character. | |
6599 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time, | |
6600 * or FAIL otherwise. | |
6601 */ | |
6602 int | |
6603 gui_mch_wait_for_chars(long wtime) | |
6604 { | |
6605 int focus; | |
6606 guint timer; | |
6607 static int timed_out; | |
6608 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
6609 static int sniff_on = 0; | |
6610 static gint sniff_input_id = 0; | |
6611 #endif | |
6612 | |
6613 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF | |
6614 if (sniff_on && !want_sniff_request) | |
6615 { | |
6616 if (sniff_input_id) | |
6617 gdk_input_remove(sniff_input_id); | |
6618 sniff_on = 0; | |
6619 } | |
6620 else if (!sniff_on && want_sniff_request) | |
6621 { | |
6622 /* Add fd_from_sniff to watch for available data in main loop. */ | |
6623 sniff_input_id = gdk_input_add(fd_from_sniff, | |
6624 GDK_INPUT_READ, sniff_request_cb, NULL); | |
6625 sniff_on = 1; | |
6626 } | |
6627 #endif | |
6628 | |
6629 timed_out = FALSE; | |
6630 | |
6631 /* this timeout makes sure that we will return if no characters arrived in | |
6632 * time */ | |
6633 | |
6634 if (wtime > 0) | |
6635 timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)wtime, input_timer_cb, &timed_out); | |
6636 else | |
6637 timer = 0; | |
6638 | |
6639 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
6640 | |
6641 do | |
6642 { | |
6643 /* Stop or start blinking when focus changes */ | |
6644 if (gui.in_focus != focus) | |
6645 { | |
6646 if (gui.in_focus) | |
6647 gui_mch_start_blink(); | |
6648 else | |
6649 gui_mch_stop_blink(); | |
6650 focus = gui.in_focus; | |
6651 } | |
6652 | |
1624 | 6653 #if defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) |
6654 /* Process the queued netbeans messages. */ | |
2210 | 6655 netbeans_parse_messages(); |
1624 | 6656 #endif |
6657 | |
7 | 6658 /* |
6659 * Loop in GTK+ processing until a timeout or input occurs. | |
22 | 6660 * Skip this if input is available anyway (can happen in rare |
6661 * situations, sort of race condition). | |
7 | 6662 */ |
22 | 6663 if (!input_available()) |
6664 gtk_main(); | |
7 | 6665 |
6666 /* Got char, return immediately */ | |
6667 if (input_available()) | |
6668 { | |
6669 if (timer != 0 && !timed_out) | |
6670 gtk_timeout_remove(timer); | |
6671 return OK; | |
6672 } | |
6673 } while (wtime < 0 || !timed_out); | |
6674 | |
6675 /* | |
6676 * Flush all eventually pending (drawing) events. | |
6677 */ | |
6678 gui_mch_update(); | |
6679 | |
6680 return FAIL; | |
6681 } | |
6682 | |
6683 | |
6684 /**************************************************************************** | |
6685 * Output drawing routines. | |
6686 ****************************************************************************/ | |
6687 | |
6688 | |
6689 /* Flush any output to the screen */ | |
6690 void | |
6691 gui_mch_flush(void) | |
6692 { | |
6693 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD | |
6694 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)) | |
6695 gdk_display_sync(gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin)); | |
6696 #else | |
6697 gdk_flush(); /* historical misnomer: calls XSync(), not XFlush() */ | |
6698 #endif | |
6699 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6700 /* This happens to actually do what gui_mch_flush() is supposed to do, | |
6701 * according to the comment above. */ | |
6702 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
6703 gdk_window_process_updates(gui.drawarea->window, FALSE); | |
6704 #endif | |
6705 } | |
6706 | |
6707 /* | |
6708 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to | |
6709 * (row2, col2) inclusive. | |
6710 */ | |
6711 void | |
6712 gui_mch_clear_block(int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2) | |
6713 { | |
6714 GdkColor color; | |
6715 | |
6716 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
6717 return; | |
6718 | |
6719 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel; | |
6720 | |
6721 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, &color); | |
6722 | |
6723 /* Clear one extra pixel at the far right, for when bold characters have | |
6724 * spilled over to the window border. */ | |
6725 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, TRUE, | |
6726 FILL_X(col1), FILL_Y(row1), | |
6727 (col2 - col1 + 1) * gui.char_width | |
6728 + (col2 == Columns - 1), | |
6729 (row2 - row1 + 1) * gui.char_height); | |
6730 } | |
6731 | |
6732 void | |
6733 gui_mch_clear_all(void) | |
6734 { | |
6735 if (gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
6736 gdk_window_clear(gui.drawarea->window); | |
6737 } | |
6738 | |
6739 /* | |
6740 * Redraw any text revealed by scrolling up/down. | |
6741 */ | |
6742 static void | |
6743 check_copy_area(void) | |
6744 { | |
6745 GdkEvent *event; | |
6746 int expose_count; | |
6747 | |
6748 if (gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL) | |
6749 return; | |
6750 | |
6751 /* Avoid redrawing the cursor while scrolling or it'll end up where | |
6752 * we don't want it to be. I'm not sure if it's correct to call | |
6753 * gui_dont_update_cursor() at this point but it works as a quick | |
6754 * fix for now. */ | |
6755 gui_dont_update_cursor(); | |
6756 | |
6757 do | |
6758 { | |
6759 /* Wait to check whether the scroll worked or not. */ | |
6760 event = gdk_event_get_graphics_expose(gui.drawarea->window); | |
6761 | |
6762 if (event == NULL) | |
6763 break; /* received NoExpose event */ | |
6764 | |
6765 gui_redraw(event->expose.area.x, event->expose.area.y, | |
6766 event->expose.area.width, event->expose.area.height); | |
6767 | |
6768 expose_count = event->expose.count; | |
6769 gdk_event_free(event); | |
6770 } | |
6771 while (expose_count > 0); /* more events follow */ | |
6772 | |
6773 gui_can_update_cursor(); | |
6774 } | |
6775 | |
6776 /* | |
6777 * Delete the given number of lines from the given row, scrolling up any | |
6778 * text further down within the scroll region. | |
6779 */ | |
6780 void | |
6781 gui_mch_delete_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
6782 { | |
6783 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
6784 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
6785 | |
6786 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6787 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
6788 | |
6789 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
6790 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6791 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
6792 gui.drawarea->window, | |
6793 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), | |
6794 FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
6795 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
6796 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
6797 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
6798 | |
6799 gui_clear_block(gui.scroll_region_bot - num_lines + 1, | |
6800 gui.scroll_region_left, | |
6801 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
6802 check_copy_area(); | |
6803 } | |
6804 | |
6805 /* | |
6806 * Insert the given number of lines before the given row, scrolling down any | |
6807 * following text within the scroll region. | |
6808 */ | |
6809 void | |
6810 gui_mch_insert_lines(int row, int num_lines) | |
6811 { | |
6812 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED) | |
6813 return; /* Can't see the window */ | |
6814 | |
6815 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor); | |
6816 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
6817 | |
6818 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */ | |
6819 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, | |
6820 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row + num_lines), | |
6821 gui.drawarea->window, | |
6822 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row), | |
6823 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right | |
6824 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1, | |
6825 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1)); | |
6826 | |
6827 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left, | |
6828 row + num_lines - 1, gui.scroll_region_right); | |
6829 check_copy_area(); | |
6830 } | |
6831 | |
6832 /* | |
6833 * X Selection stuff, for cutting and pasting text to other windows. | |
6834 */ | |
6835 void | |
6836 clip_mch_request_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
6837 { | |
6838 GdkAtom target; | |
6839 unsigned i; | |
1494 | 6840 time_t start; |
7 | 6841 |
6842 for (i = 0; i < N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i) | |
6843 { | |
1904 | 6844 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE |
6845 if (!clip_html && selection_targets[i].info == TARGET_HTML) | |
6846 continue; | |
6847 #endif | |
7 | 6848 received_selection = RS_NONE; |
6849 target = gdk_atom_intern(selection_targets[i].target, FALSE); | |
6850 | |
6851 gtk_selection_convert(gui.drawarea, | |
6852 cbd->gtk_sel_atom, target, | |
6853 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
6854 | |
1494 | 6855 /* Hack: Wait up to three seconds for the selection. A hang was |
6856 * noticed here when using the netrw plugin combined with ":gui" | |
6857 * during the FocusGained event. */ | |
6858 start = time(NULL); | |
6859 while (received_selection == RS_NONE && time(NULL) < start + 3) | |
7 | 6860 gtk_main(); /* wait for selection_received_cb */ |
6861 | |
6862 if (received_selection != RS_FAIL) | |
6863 return; | |
6864 } | |
6865 | |
6866 /* Final fallback position - use the X CUT_BUFFER0 store */ | |
1924 | 6867 yank_cut_buffer0(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window), cbd); |
7 | 6868 } |
6869 | |
6870 /* | |
6871 * Disown the selection. | |
6872 */ | |
6873 void | |
1884 | 6874 clip_mch_lose_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
7 | 6875 { |
6876 /* WEIRD: when using NULL to actually disown the selection, we lose the | |
6877 * selection the first time we own it. */ | |
6878 /* | |
6879 gtk_selection_owner_set(NULL, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME); | |
6880 gui_mch_update(); | |
6881 */ | |
6882 } | |
6883 | |
6884 /* | |
6885 * Own the selection and return OK if it worked. | |
6886 */ | |
6887 int | |
6888 clip_mch_own_selection(VimClipboard *cbd) | |
6889 { | |
6890 int success; | |
6891 | |
6892 success = gtk_selection_owner_set(gui.drawarea, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, | |
2270
917fff7bc09d
Fixes for time in clipboard request. Also fix ownership. (David Fries)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2254
diff
changeset
|
6893 clipboard_event_time); |
7 | 6894 gui_mch_update(); |
6895 return (success) ? OK : FAIL; | |
6896 } | |
6897 | |
6898 /* | |
6899 * Send the current selection to the clipboard. Do nothing for X because we | |
6900 * will fill in the selection only when requested by another app. | |
6901 */ | |
6902 void | |
1884 | 6903 clip_mch_set_selection(VimClipboard *cbd UNUSED) |
7 | 6904 { |
6905 } | |
6906 | |
6907 | |
6908 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO) | |
6909 /* | |
6910 * Make a menu item appear either active or not active (grey or not grey). | |
6911 */ | |
6912 void | |
6913 gui_mch_menu_grey(vimmenu_T *menu, int grey) | |
6914 { | |
6915 if (menu->id == NULL) | |
6916 return; | |
6917 | |
6918 if (menu_is_separator(menu->name)) | |
6919 grey = TRUE; | |
6920 | |
6921 gui_mch_menu_hidden(menu, FALSE); | |
6922 /* Be clever about bitfields versus true booleans here! */ | |
6923 if (!GTK_WIDGET_SENSITIVE(menu->id) == !grey) | |
6924 { | |
6925 gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu->id, !grey); | |
6926 gui_mch_update(); | |
6927 } | |
6928 } | |
6929 | |
6930 /* | |
6931 * Make menu item hidden or not hidden. | |
6932 */ | |
6933 void | |
6934 gui_mch_menu_hidden(vimmenu_T *menu, int hidden) | |
6935 { | |
6936 if (menu->id == 0) | |
6937 return; | |
6938 | |
6939 if (hidden) | |
6940 { | |
6941 if (GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
6942 { | |
6943 gtk_widget_hide(menu->id); | |
6944 gui_mch_update(); | |
6945 } | |
6946 } | |
6947 else | |
6948 { | |
6949 if (!GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id)) | |
6950 { | |
6951 gtk_widget_show(menu->id); | |
6952 gui_mch_update(); | |
6953 } | |
6954 } | |
6955 } | |
6956 | |
6957 /* | |
6958 * This is called after setting all the menus to grey/hidden or not. | |
6959 */ | |
6960 void | |
6961 gui_mch_draw_menubar(void) | |
6962 { | |
6963 /* just make sure that the visual changes get effect immediately */ | |
6964 gui_mch_update(); | |
6965 } | |
6966 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */ | |
6967 | |
6968 /* | |
6969 * Scrollbar stuff. | |
6970 */ | |
6971 void | |
6972 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(scrollbar_T *sb, int flag) | |
6973 { | |
6974 if (sb->id == NULL) | |
6975 return; | |
6976 | |
6977 if (flag) | |
6978 gtk_widget_show(sb->id); | |
6979 else | |
6980 gtk_widget_hide(sb->id); | |
6981 | |
791 | 6982 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0); |
7 | 6983 } |
6984 | |
6985 | |
6986 /* | |
6987 * Return the RGB value of a pixel as long. | |
6988 */ | |
6989 long_u | |
6990 gui_mch_get_rgb(guicolor_T pixel) | |
6991 { | |
6992 GdkColor color; | |
6993 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 | |
6994 GdkColorContext *cc; | |
6995 | |
6996 cc = gdk_color_context_new(gtk_widget_get_visual(gui.drawarea), | |
6997 gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea)); | |
6998 color.pixel = pixel; | |
6999 gdk_color_context_query_color(cc, &color); | |
7000 | |
7001 gdk_color_context_free(cc); | |
7002 #else | |
7003 gdk_colormap_query_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), | |
7004 (unsigned long)pixel, &color); | |
7005 #endif | |
7006 | |
7007 return (((unsigned)color.red & 0xff00) << 8) | |
7008 | ((unsigned)color.green & 0xff00) | |
7009 | (((unsigned)color.blue & 0xff00) >> 8); | |
7010 } | |
7011 | |
7012 /* | |
88 | 7013 * Get current mouse coordinates in text window. |
7 | 7014 */ |
88 | 7015 void |
7016 gui_mch_getmouse(int *x, int *y) | |
7 | 7017 { |
88 | 7018 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, x, y, NULL); |
7 | 7019 } |
7020 | |
7021 void | |
7022 gui_mch_setmouse(int x, int y) | |
7023 { | |
7024 /* Sorry for the Xlib call, but we can't avoid it, since there is no | |
7025 * internal GDK mechanism present to accomplish this. (and for good | |
7026 * reason...) */ | |
7027 XWarpPointer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.drawarea->window), | |
7028 (Window)0, GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.drawarea->window), | |
7029 0, 0, 0U, 0U, x, y); | |
7030 } | |
7031 | |
7032 | |
7033 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
7034 /* The last set mouse pointer shape is remembered, to be used when it goes | |
7035 * from hidden to not hidden. */ | |
7036 static int last_shape = 0; | |
7037 #endif | |
7038 | |
7039 /* | |
7040 * Use the blank mouse pointer or not. | |
7041 * | |
7042 * hide: TRUE = use blank ptr, FALSE = use parent ptr | |
7043 */ | |
7044 void | |
7045 gui_mch_mousehide(int hide) | |
7046 { | |
7047 if (gui.pointer_hidden != hide) | |
7048 { | |
7049 gui.pointer_hidden = hide; | |
7050 if (gui.drawarea->window && gui.blank_pointer != NULL) | |
7051 { | |
7052 if (hide) | |
7053 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
7054 else | |
7055 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE | |
7056 mch_set_mouse_shape(last_shape); | |
7057 #else | |
7058 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, NULL); | |
7059 #endif | |
7060 } | |
7061 } | |
7062 } | |
7063 | |
7064 #if defined(FEAT_MOUSESHAPE) || defined(PROTO) | |
7065 | |
7066 /* Table for shape IDs. Keep in sync with the mshape_names[] table in | |
7067 * misc2.c! */ | |
7068 static const int mshape_ids[] = | |
7069 { | |
7070 GDK_LEFT_PTR, /* arrow */ | |
7071 GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP, /* blank */ | |
7072 GDK_XTERM, /* beam */ | |
7073 GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* updown */ | |
7074 GDK_SIZING, /* udsizing */ | |
7075 GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* leftright */ | |
7076 GDK_SIZING, /* lrsizing */ | |
7077 GDK_WATCH, /* busy */ | |
7078 GDK_X_CURSOR, /* no */ | |
7079 GDK_CROSSHAIR, /* crosshair */ | |
7080 GDK_HAND1, /* hand1 */ | |
7081 GDK_HAND2, /* hand2 */ | |
7082 GDK_PENCIL, /* pencil */ | |
7083 GDK_QUESTION_ARROW, /* question */ | |
7084 GDK_RIGHT_PTR, /* right-arrow */ | |
7085 GDK_CENTER_PTR, /* up-arrow */ | |
7086 GDK_LEFT_PTR /* last one */ | |
7087 }; | |
7088 | |
7089 void | |
7090 mch_set_mouse_shape(int shape) | |
7091 { | |
7092 int id; | |
7093 GdkCursor *c; | |
7094 | |
7095 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL) | |
7096 return; | |
7097 | |
7098 if (shape == MSHAPE_HIDE || gui.pointer_hidden) | |
7099 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer); | |
7100 else | |
7101 { | |
7102 if (shape >= MSHAPE_NUMBERED) | |
7103 { | |
7104 id = shape - MSHAPE_NUMBERED; | |
7105 if (id >= GDK_LAST_CURSOR) | |
7106 id = GDK_LEFT_PTR; | |
7107 else | |
7108 id &= ~1; /* they are always even (why?) */ | |
7109 } | |
1884 | 7110 else if (shape < (int)(sizeof(mshape_ids) / sizeof(int))) |
7 | 7111 id = mshape_ids[shape]; |
842 | 7112 else |
7113 return; | |
7 | 7114 # ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD |
7115 c = gdk_cursor_new_for_display( | |
136 | 7116 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.drawarea), (GdkCursorType)id); |
7 | 7117 # else |
136 | 7118 c = gdk_cursor_new((GdkCursorType)id); |
7 | 7119 # endif |
7120 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, c); | |
7121 gdk_cursor_destroy(c); /* Unref, actually. Bloody GTK+ 1. */ | |
7122 } | |
7123 if (shape != MSHAPE_HIDE) | |
7124 last_shape = shape; | |
7125 } | |
7126 #endif /* FEAT_MOUSESHAPE */ | |
7127 | |
7128 | |
7129 #if defined(FEAT_SIGN_ICONS) || defined(PROTO) | |
7130 /* | |
7131 * Signs are currently always 2 chars wide. With GTK+ 2, the image will be | |
7132 * scaled down if the current font is not big enough, or scaled up if the image | |
7133 * size is less than 3/4 of the maximum sign size. With GTK+ 1, the pixmap | |
7134 * will be cut off if the current font is not big enough, or centered if it's | |
7135 * too small. | |
7136 */ | |
7137 # define SIGN_WIDTH (2 * gui.char_width) | |
7138 # define SIGN_HEIGHT (gui.char_height) | |
7139 # define SIGN_ASPECT ((double)SIGN_HEIGHT / (double)SIGN_WIDTH) | |
7140 | |
7141 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2 | |
7142 | |
7143 void | |
7144 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr) | |
7145 { | |
7146 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
7147 | |
7148 sign = (GdkPixbuf *)sign_get_image(typenr); | |
7149 | |
7150 if (sign != NULL && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
7151 { | |
7152 int width; | |
7153 int height; | |
7154 int xoffset; | |
7155 int yoffset; | |
7156 int need_scale; | |
7157 | |
7158 width = gdk_pixbuf_get_width(sign); | |
7159 height = gdk_pixbuf_get_height(sign); | |
7160 /* | |
7161 * Decide whether we need to scale. Allow one pixel of border | |
7162 * width to be cut off, in order to avoid excessive scaling for | |
7163 * tiny differences in font size. | |
7164 */ | |
7165 need_scale = (width > SIGN_WIDTH + 2 | |
7166 || height > SIGN_HEIGHT + 2 | |
7167 || (width < 3 * SIGN_WIDTH / 4 | |
7168 && height < 3 * SIGN_HEIGHT / 4)); | |
7169 if (need_scale) | |
7170 { | |
7171 double aspect; | |
7172 | |
7173 /* Keep the original aspect ratio */ | |
7174 aspect = (double)height / (double)width; | |
7175 width = (double)SIGN_WIDTH * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect; | |
7176 width = MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH); | |
7177 height = (double)width * aspect; | |
7178 | |
7179 /* This doesn't seem to be worth caching, and doing so | |
7180 * would complicate the code quite a bit. */ | |
7181 sign = gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple(sign, width, height, | |
7182 GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR); | |
7183 if (sign == NULL) | |
7184 return; /* out of memory */ | |
7185 } | |
7186 | |
7187 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore | |
7188 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than | |
7189 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */ | |
7190 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2; | |
7191 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2; | |
7192 | |
7193 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
7194 | |
7195 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7196 gui.text_gc, | |
7197 TRUE, | |
7198 FILL_X(col), | |
7199 FILL_Y(row), | |
7200 SIGN_WIDTH, | |
7201 SIGN_HEIGHT); | |
7202 | |
7203 # if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,1) | |
7204 gdk_draw_pixbuf(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7205 NULL, | |
7206 sign, | |
7207 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
7208 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
7209 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
7210 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
7211 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
7212 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT), | |
7213 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL, | |
7214 0, 0); | |
7215 # else | |
7216 gdk_pixbuf_render_to_drawable_alpha(sign, | |
7217 gui.drawarea->window, | |
7218 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
7219 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
7220 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
7221 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
7222 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
7223 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT), | |
7224 GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL, | |
7225 127, | |
7226 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL, | |
7227 0, 0); | |
7228 # endif | |
7229 if (need_scale) | |
7230 g_object_unref(sign); | |
7231 } | |
7232 } | |
7233 | |
7234 void * | |
7235 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile) | |
7236 { | |
7237 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' && gui.in_use) | |
7238 { | |
7239 GdkPixbuf *sign; | |
7240 GError *error = NULL; | |
7241 char_u *message; | |
7242 | |
7243 sign = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file((const char *)signfile, &error); | |
7244 | |
7245 if (error == NULL) | |
7246 return sign; | |
7247 | |
7248 message = (char_u *)error->message; | |
7249 | |
7250 if (message != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
7251 message = string_convert(&input_conv, message, NULL); | |
7252 | |
7253 if (message != NULL) | |
7254 { | |
7255 /* The error message is already translated and will be more | |
7256 * descriptive than anything we could possibly do ourselves. */ | |
7257 EMSG2("E255: %s", message); | |
7258 | |
7259 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE) | |
7260 vim_free(message); | |
7261 } | |
7262 g_error_free(error); | |
7263 } | |
7264 | |
7265 return NULL; | |
7266 } | |
7267 | |
7268 void | |
7269 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign) | |
7270 { | |
7271 if (sign != NULL) | |
7272 g_object_unref(sign); | |
7273 } | |
7274 | |
7275 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
7276 | |
7277 typedef struct | |
7278 { | |
7279 GdkPixmap *pixmap; | |
7280 GdkBitmap *mask; | |
7281 } | |
7282 signicon_T; | |
7283 | |
7284 void | |
7285 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr) | |
7286 { | |
7287 signicon_T *sign; | |
7288 | |
7289 sign = (signicon_T *)sign_get_image(typenr); | |
7290 | |
7291 if (sign != NULL && sign->pixmap != NULL | |
7292 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
7293 { | |
7294 int width; | |
7295 int height; | |
7296 int xoffset; | |
7297 int yoffset; | |
7298 | |
7299 gdk_window_get_size(sign->pixmap, &width, &height); | |
7300 | |
7301 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore | |
7302 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than | |
7303 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */ | |
7304 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2; | |
7305 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2; | |
7306 | |
7307 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor); | |
7308 | |
7309 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7310 gui.text_gc, | |
7311 TRUE, | |
7312 FILL_X(col), | |
7313 FILL_Y(row), | |
7314 SIGN_WIDTH, | |
7315 SIGN_HEIGHT); | |
7316 | |
7317 /* Set the clip mask for bilevel transparency */ | |
7318 if (sign->mask != NULL) | |
7319 { | |
7320 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, | |
7321 FILL_X(col) - xoffset, | |
7322 FILL_Y(row) - yoffset); | |
7323 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, sign->mask); | |
7324 } | |
7325 | |
7326 gdk_draw_pixmap(gui.drawarea->window, | |
7327 gui.text_gc, | |
7328 sign->pixmap, | |
7329 MAX(0, xoffset), | |
7330 MAX(0, yoffset), | |
7331 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset), | |
7332 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset), | |
7333 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH), | |
7334 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT)); | |
7335 | |
7336 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, NULL); | |
7337 } | |
7338 } | |
7339 | |
7340 void * | |
7341 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile) | |
7342 { | |
7343 signicon_T *sign = NULL; | |
7344 | |
7345 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' | |
7346 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL) | |
7347 { | |
7348 sign = (signicon_T *)alloc(sizeof(signicon_T)); | |
7349 | |
7350 if (sign != NULL) /* NULL == OOM == "cannot really happen" */ | |
7351 { | |
7352 sign->mask = NULL; | |
7353 sign->pixmap = gdk_pixmap_colormap_create_from_xpm( | |
7354 gui.drawarea->window, NULL, | |
7355 &sign->mask, NULL, | |
7356 (const char *)signfile); | |
7357 | |
7358 if (sign->pixmap == NULL) | |
7359 { | |
7360 vim_free(sign); | |
7361 sign = NULL; | |
7362 EMSG(_(e_signdata)); | |
7363 } | |
7364 } | |
7365 } | |
7366 return sign; | |
7367 } | |
7368 | |
7369 void | |
7370 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign) | |
7371 { | |
7372 if (sign != NULL) | |
7373 { | |
7374 signicon_T *signicon = (signicon_T *)sign; | |
7375 | |
7376 if (signicon->pixmap != NULL) | |
7377 gdk_pixmap_unref(signicon->pixmap); | |
7378 if (signicon->mask != NULL) | |
7379 gdk_bitmap_unref(signicon->mask); | |
7380 | |
7381 vim_free(signicon); | |
7382 } | |
7383 } | |
7384 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */ | |
7385 | |
7386 #endif /* FEAT_SIGN_ICONS */ |